JP7358213B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

A pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, includes a storage part that can store game media supplied from a game island installed in a game parlor, a payout device (payout part) that can pay out the game media, A guide passage forming part that forms a guide passage for guiding the game media supplied to the storage part to the payout part, and the storage part and the guide passage forming part are attached to the game frame with screw members. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-96050

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the screw members for attaching the storage section and the guide passage forming section to the game frame, the screw members attached inside the game island, etc. come off, and the storage section and the guide passage forming section are formed. If the screw member falls into the dispensing device along with the game media, the game media may not be able to be dispensed properly, the dispensing device may malfunction, or the screw member together with the game media may fall into the dispensing device. There was a problem in that the funds were sometimes paid out.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent screw members from getting mixed into the payout section.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a starting area;
An operation means that can be operated by a player;
a vibration performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance and a special vibration performance as the vibration performance in which the operating means vibrates;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming part having an open top surface and forming a guide passage for guiding game media in the storage part to the payout part;
a screw drop restriction portion provided to cover the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion;
Equipped with
The vibration effect can be executed based on the gaming medium dispensed from the dispensing unit entering the starting area,
The screw fall restriction part is
The game medium that has fallen onto the screw fall restriction portion does not stay there, and the screw member that has fallen onto the screw fall restriction portion can stay on the screw fall restriction portion without falling into the guide path forming portion. configured,
A first component capable of retaining the screw member that has fallen onto the screw fall restricting portion on the screw fall restricting portion; and a second component having a higher degree of retention of the screw member than the first component. have,
The second component is configured at a position closer to the dispensing part than the first component,
The vibration performance execution means is capable of executing the vibration performance in conjunction with execution of a specific performance,
The vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance,
It is characterized by
The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
a storage section (for example, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (for example, game balls P);
A payout unit (for example, payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guiding passage forming part (for example, first guiding passage forming part 202) having an open top surface and forming a guiding passage (for example, a first guiding passage or a second guiding passage) for guiding game media in the storage part to the dispensing part. and second guide passage forming part 204),
a cover part (for example, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, a third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part;
Equipped with
The cover part is provided with a predetermined restriction part (for example, the elongated hole 316A) for restricting the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover part from falling into the guide passage forming part. ~316C, concave grooves 326A~326C, and concave portions 336) (see FIGS. 22 and 24),
A plurality of specific restriction parts (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided in the guide passage forming part for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming part to the dispensing part (FIG. 11). , see Figures 12 and 27),
The predetermined restriction section includes a first retention section (for example, the elongated hole 316A) that can retain the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover section. - 316C) and a second retention part (for example, grooves 326A to 326C),
The second retention part is provided at a position closer to the dispensing part (for example, the dispensing device 200) than the first retention part, and is larger than the first retention part (L22B>L21),
moreover,
Operation means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
The vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates includes a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, based on vibration control data included in a variable display effect control pattern). Vibration performance execution means (for example, the variable display performance in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part performance control pattern and the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) a production control CPU 120 that executes processing, etc.);
A light emitting effect executing means (for example, in step AKS203) capable of executing a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect (for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light according to the emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern). (e.g., a production control CPU 120 that executes the variable display production process in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit production control pattern determined by the above);
Specific performance execution means (for example, based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific performance (for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game (e.g., a production control CPU 120 that executes the variable display processing in step S172),
When the predetermined vibration presentation is executed than when the predetermined vibration presentation is not executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher (for example, jackpot reliability according to the operation section presentation pattern, etc.);
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled varies depending on the light emitting mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, depending on the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern). Jackpot reliability depending on the purpose of the operation part production pattern),
The vibration performance execution means is capable of executing the special vibration performance in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance (for example, execution of the vibration performance during periods AKZ01 to AKZ05),
The predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance have different vibration modes (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part can be prevented from falling into the guide passage forming part.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine of means 2 below. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been a technique for providing a vibrating means in a ball firing handle in a gaming machine, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-38019. However, in such gaming machines, there is room for improvement in improving the entertainment of the performance using vibrations, and in view of this, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that can improve the entertainment of the game when performing performances using vibrations. ing.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Operation means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
The vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates includes a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, based on vibration control data included in a variable display effect control pattern). Vibration performance execution means (for example, the variable display performance in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part performance control pattern and the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) a production control CPU 120 that executes processing, etc.);
A light emitting effect executing means (for example, in step AKS203) capable of executing a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect (for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light according to the emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern). (e.g., a production control CPU 120 that executes the variable display production process in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit production control pattern determined by the above);
Specific performance execution means (for example, based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific performance (for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game and a production control CPU 120 that executes the variable display processing in step S172),
When the predetermined vibration presentation is executed than when the predetermined vibration presentation is not executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher (for example, jackpot reliability according to the operation section presentation pattern, etc.);
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled varies depending on the light emitting mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, depending on the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern). Jackpot reliability depending on the purpose of the operation part performance pattern),
The vibration performance execution means is capable of executing the special vibration performance in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance (for example, execution of the vibration performance during periods AKZ01 to AKZ05),
The vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 are different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something that you have.

It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view showing the pachinko game machine. It is a left side view showing a pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing a gaming machine frame to which a gaming board is attached. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the pachinko game machine as seen diagonally from behind. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. It is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment structure of the passage formation body to the gaming machine frame. It is an enlarged back view showing the back upper part of the gaming machine frame. (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10(A), (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 10(A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 10(A). (A) is a plan view showing the first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a DD cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE in (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF in (A). (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line II in (A), (C) is a sectional view taken along JJ line in (A), and (D) is a plan view showing the third cover body. (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. (A) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming part in which the ball stopper member is in the first state; (B) is a longitudinal sectional view showing the first guide passage forming part in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. FIG. (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is attached, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK in (A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in (B). It is a perspective view showing the state around the ball tank section on the back side of the game frame as seen diagonally from behind. (A) is a plan view showing the vicinity of the ball tank portion on the back side of the game frame, and (B) is a sectional view taken along the line MM in (A). It is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the first guide passage forming part on the back side of the game frame is viewed diagonally from behind. It is a top view which shows the periphery of the 1st guidance path formation part on the back surface of a game frame. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing the rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 21. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 21, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ in FIG. 22 is a sectional view taken along the line RR in FIG. 21. FIG. 22 is a sectional view taken along the line SS in FIG. 21. FIG. (A) shows the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) shows the state when the ball stopper is in the second state. (D) is a sectional view taken along the line UU in (C), showing the retention state of the screw member. FIG. 7 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the movement of the screw member. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 1st guidance path formation part which shows the moving state of the game ball on a cover part. (A) is a schematic back view showing a cover part as a modified example, and (B) is a schematic back view showing a state in which cables are wired to cross the cover part. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the gaming machine in the feature section 053SG. It is a figure showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a figure showing the solder side of the game control board in Example 1. It is a figure showing the mounting surface of the state where the input circuit and the output circuit were mounted on the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern branched from a data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a circuit diagram showing a connection mode of low voltage components and high voltage components mounted on the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a figure showing the wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder side of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing a state in which the game control board in Example 1 is housed in a board case. It is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1 and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface. It is a figure showing an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure showing an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. It is a figure showing the solder side of the game control board in Example 2. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 2. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. It is a circuit diagram concerning connection of a game control microcomputer, an input circuit, and an output circuit in a game control board in Example 2. It is a perspective view showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above the specific electronic component, and (B) is a perspective view from below the specific electronic component. FIG. It is a sectional view showing a state where specific electronic parts are soldered to the game control board in Example 3. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of stop symbol determination processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting regarding a setting suggestion production execution determination table. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example and a setting example regarding a setting suggestion pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of a setting suggestion effect. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine concerning feature part 10SH. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine related to the feature section 10SH. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing related to the feature section 10SH. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of vibration performance and jackpot reliability. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution timing of a vibration production and a line-of-sight guidance production, and a production period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of a vibration performance and a line-of-sight guidance performance. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of a vibration performance and a line-of-sight guidance performance. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a presentation device regarding characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting when performing an operation part production pattern and a specific interlocking production. It is a figure showing the setting contents of a vibration pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of an effect by vibration and light emission. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a continuous performance pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a performance control pattern. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a timing at which an operation section effect can be executed. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a diagram showing an example of execution of an effect that causes a game effect lamp to emit light. It is a diagram showing an example of setting a performance period in which a specific interlocking performance can be executed. It is a figure showing an example of performance execution when a reach performance is performed. It is a figure showing an example of performance execution when a reach performance is performed. It is a figure showing an example of performance execution when a reach performance is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of music reproduction execution.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing a gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings.

(form)
Type 1 gaming machine is
A storage section (for example, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (for example, game balls P);
A payout unit (for example, payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guiding passage forming part (for example, the first guiding passage forming part 202) having an open top surface and forming a guiding passage (for example, a first guiding passage or a second guiding passage) for guiding game media in the storage part to the dispensing part. and second guide passage forming part 204),
It is characterized by having the following.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
A cover part provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part (for example, the cover part 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320, the cover part of the third cover body 330) 334),
The cover part restricts screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover part from falling to the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202). Predetermined limiting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recessed portion 336) are provided for this purpose (see FIGS. 22 and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part can be prevented from falling into the guide passage forming part.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 2,
The predetermined restriction portions (for example, the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the grooves 326A to 326C, and the recessed portion 336) are provided so that the game media that has fallen onto the cover portion can fall from above the cover portion without being retained. It is characterized by
According to this feature, the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restriction part, and a state in which the screw member can be retained at all times can be maintained, so that the screw member that falls onto the cover part falls into the guide passage forming part. This can be prevented.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine according to Form 2 or 3,
The predetermined restriction section includes a first retention section (for example, the elongated hole 316A) that can retain the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover section. - 316C) and a second retention part (for example, grooves 326A to 326C),
The second retention part is provided at a position closer to the dispensing part (for example, the dispensing device 200) than the first retention part, and is larger than the first retention part (L22B>L21).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retention part as it approaches the dispensing part, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part from moving and falling into the guide passage forming part.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 4,
The dispensing unit (for example, dispensing device) of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen into the guide passage forming unit (for example, the first guide passage forming unit 202) A plurality of specific restriction parts (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided for restricting movement to 200) (see FIGS. 12 and 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming section from entering the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine described in Form 5,
The specific restriction portion is a plurality of holes (for example, holes 271A to 271H),
At least two or more of the plurality of holes have a size that allows the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming part to fall out of the guiding passage forming part before reaching the dispensing part. (L11>L2, see Figure 11)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if a screw member gets mixed in the guide passage forming part, it can be dropped from the hole to the outside of the guiding passage forming part, so that the screw member mixed in the guiding passage forming part does not get mixed into the dispensing part. can be prevented. Further, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game medium from being obstructed by the screw member mixed into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine described in Form 6,
The plurality of holes have different sizes,
The largest predetermined hole among the plurality of holes is provided at the position closest to the dispensing section (for example, the left-right dimension L12 of the hole 271H is larger than the left-right dimensions of the other holes 271A to 271G). (See Figure 12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the screw member can be suitably dropped from the predetermined hole to the outside of the guide passage forming part, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming part from getting mixed into the dispensing part. .

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine described in Form 6 or 7,
The cover parts (for example, the cover part 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320, the third cover body 330) There is an uncovered area (for example, an uncovered area 350) that is not covered by the cover part 334),
At least some of the plurality of specific restriction parts (for example, holes 271B to 271H) are provided at positions corresponding to the non-covered areas in the guide passage forming part (see FIG. 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the screw member enters the guide passage forming part from the non-covered area, it can be dropped out of the guiding passage forming part through the hole.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 8,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) in which the storage section (for example, the ball tank forming section 201) is provided,
The storage section is
arranged on the upper surface side of a predetermined part (for example, the first protrusion 224) of the game frame,
The screw member is close to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so as not to enter between the screw member and the upper surface of the predetermined portion (L30<L1, see FIG. 19(B)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering between the predetermined portion of the game frame and the storage portion and damaging the member.

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9,
a first board (for example, the main board 11, the effect control board 12, etc.) attached at a position below the guide path forming part (for example, the first guide path forming part 202);
a second board (for example, a terminal board 210) attached at a position above the guide path forming part;
Equipped with
The first board is mounted by a mounting method using screw members, while the second board is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members (for example, the board cases 11A, 12A, etc. are mounted by a mounting method using screw members). While the terminal board 210 is attached to the game board 2 by using a screw member, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 using a locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting parts 235 and a locking part 236 as a mounting means different from a screw member. (See Figure 17)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to Form 10,
The second board is an external output board (for example, terminal board 210) to which wiring (for example, cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is connected;
The first board has a smaller number of connected wires than the external output board (for example, the number of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming part 202 The number of cables C that can be connected to is the first number (for example, 20), while the number of cables C that can be connected to the Each signal line is also connected to the board, but the second number (for example, 10) is smaller than the first number.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the second board, which has a large number of connected wires and is likely to be subject to external force during wiring connection work, cannot be attached with screw members, the screw members may come off due to external force being applied to the external output board. It is possible to prevent it from falling into the guide passage forming section.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine according to Form 10 or 11,
a game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) in which the storage section (for example, the ball tank forming section 201) is provided;
a mounting frame (for example, board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board to the game frame;
Equipped with
The mounting frame is characterized in that it has a mounting frame restriction portion (for example, the recess 242) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen onto the mounting frame toward the guide path forming portion.
According to this feature, by using the mounting frame of the external output board, it is possible to prevent a screw member that has fallen into the guide path forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 12,
The guide passages of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage forming part are placed around the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202). Special restriction parts (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) are provided to restrict falling into the forming part (Fig. 22(C), Fig. 23(A), (B), Fig. 24). reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to Form 13,
The special restriction section prevents the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage formation section (for example, the first guidance passage formation section 202) to the guidance passage formation section. A special retention part (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can be retained before reaching the attached part, and is provided below the screw member attached to the attached part,
The screw member that has come off from the attached part but does not stay in the special retention part can move toward the cover part (see FIG. 22(C), FIG. 23(A)(B), and FIG. 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member detached from the attached portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of Form 15 is the gaming machine according to Form 13 or 14,
The special retention portion is a recess (for example, recess 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can accommodate at least a portion of the screw member,
The depth of the recess is the depth at which a part of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is accommodated (see FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), 24(B), and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member staying in the recess can be easily taken out.

The gaming machine of Form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 15,
comprising a cover part (for example, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202),
The cover part is provided so as to be inclined downward toward the dispensing part side,
A specific portion (for example, a ball stopper member 340) that can retain a screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion in the cover portion is provided on the dispensing portion side in the inclination direction of the cover portion (see FIG. 15, see Figures 26 and 27)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 17 is the gaming machine described in Form 16,
The specific portion (e.g., ball stopper member 340) sets the guide path forming portion (e.g., first guide path forming portion 202) in a first state in which the game medium (e.g., game ball P) can flow down; It is possible to change to a second state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game medium in the guide passage forming part to flow down (for example, the rotating part 341 is located in the upright position and the front wall part 341A deviates upward from the slit 344). A first state in which the game balls in the first guide path forming part 202 can flow down to the second guide path forming part 204, and a first state in which the rotating part 341 is located at the tilted position and the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344. (It is possible to change into a second state in which the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 cannot flow down (or it is difficult to flow down) into the second guide path forming part 204.) ,
When the specific portion is in the second state, the screw member is more easily retained than when it is in the first state (see FIG. 26).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 18 is the gaming machine according to Form 16 or 17,
The cover part is
A first cover part provided with a retention part (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recessed part 336) capable of retaining a screw member that has fallen onto the cover part ( For example, the cover part 324 of the first cover body 310, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320),
A second cover part (for example, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330), which is different from the first cover part and is provided with the specific part;
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 19 is the gaming machine according to Form 18,
The second cover part (for example, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330) is attached with a screw member (for example, the screw member N16) having a locking part (for example, the flange part F) (FIG. 8). reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 19,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) in which the storage section (for example, the ball tank forming section 201) is provided,
The storage portion is attached to the gaming frame at a plurality of locations by screw members having locking portions (for example, screw members N11 to N14),
The screw members for attaching the storage portion and the guide path forming portion (for example, the first guide path forming portion 202) to the game frame are configured so that they fall outside the guide path forming portion even if they are removed from the game frame. Installed (see Figure 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while the screw member that attaches the storage part is difficult to come off from the game frame, the screw member that attaches the storage part and the guide passage forming part falls outside the guide passage forming part even if it comes off, so the guide It is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the passage forming part from getting mixed into the dispensing part.

The gaming machine of Form 21 is the gaming machine according to Form 20,
A plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion (e.g., ball tank forming portion 201) and the guiding path forming portion (e.g., first guiding path forming portion 202) to the gaming frame (e.g., gaming machine frame 3). Among them, a predetermined screw member (for example, screw member N12) near the periphery of the gaming machine is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, ground wire 226) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the number of screw members can be reduced, it is possible to prevent screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 22 is the gaming machine according to Form 20 or 21,
The screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage section (for example, the ball tank forming section 201) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are used to reinforce the game frame. Attached to a metal member (for example, metal plate 222) (see FIG. 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the storage section can be firmly attached.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 20 to 22,
The screw members (for example, screw members N3 to N6) attached above the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202) in the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are The present invention is characterized in that the screw member is different from the screw member having the locking portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 20 to 23,
A game board (for example, game board 2) that can be attached and detached to the game frame (for example, game machine frame 3) is provided,
In the area below the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202) of the game board, there is an inclined surface (for example, above the cover body 220) that allows the falling screw member to flow down. A wall portion 220H) is provided (see FIGS. 18 to 20 and 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen from the guide path forming part to the game board from bouncing back and being mixed into the guide path forming part again.

The gaming machine of Form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 24,
a cover part (for example, the cover part 360 of Modification 1) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part (for example, the first guide passage forming part 202);
The guide passage forming part is
a first passage forming part (e.g., first guide passage forming part 202) extending downwardly toward one side (e.g., left side);
a second passage forming part (e.g., second guide passage forming part 204) extending downward from the lower end of the first passage forming part;
has
The cover part is provided along the first passage forming part so that the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part moves and falls from the lower end to the outside of the guiding passage forming part (FIG. 29). See A))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming section from getting mixed into the dispensing section.

The gaming machine of Form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2 to 25,
Wiring (for example, a cable CH) is provided at a position near the predetermined limiting section (for example, the recess 361) in the cover section (for example, the cover section 360 of Modification 1) so as to cross the guide path forming section. (See Figure 29(B))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is likely to get caught on the wiring and stay in the predetermined restriction portion.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
First, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located will be referred to as the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction will be referred to as the rear. Further, the explanation will be made based on the up, down, right and left directions as seen from a player located in front of the pachinko game machine 1.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired and hit into this game area Y from a predetermined ball launcher. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is rotatably provided on the gaming machine frame 3 around the left side, and the gaming area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. It is composed of a panel plate provided with a guide rail 2b (not shown), and a spacer member integrally attached to the back side of the panel plate. The game board 2 is made of a non-transparent material such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. It may be configured as follows.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the gaming area Y), special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information are variably displayed (also referred to as a special symbol game). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area Y on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images. Note that a frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). , the first suspension display 25A displays the first suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit, and the second suspension display 25B displays the second suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, a starting winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the starting winning hole door is in the closed position, so that the second starting winning hole is opened. It becomes a closed state in which game balls do not enter (it is also said that the second starting prize opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state where the game ball can enter the second starting winning port (second It is also said that the starting prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable prize winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces. Further, when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning hole, including the general winning hole, is also referred to as "winning." In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area Y). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area Y, there is provided an out opening (not shown) into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and furthermore, a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area Y. It is being The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward the gaming area Y using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held so as to be supplied to the batted ball firing device ( A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) for storing batted balls is provided. A payout opening is provided below the upper plate from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full. Note that a ball supply tray (lower tray) may be provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area Y by a player's rotational operation on the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state described later (although the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Incidentally, the jackpot type is set in "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", will be returned to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). Incidentally, there is no need for a "small win" to be displayed as a result of the special figure game.

Incidentally, the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, jackpot games during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, jackpot types that make the subsequent gaming state a high probability state) By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board 37 (see Figure 3), an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board 91 (see Figure 3), etc. There is.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a first starting prize or a second starting winning, and if there is a winning, the CPU 103 uses random numbers such as for determining the special figure display result, for determining the jackpot type, and for determining the fluctuation pattern. is extracted and stored (stored) in the top of empty entries in the first special figure reservation storage section and the second special figure reservation storage section.

In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to start the special pattern game based on the presence or absence of pending data stored in the first special pattern storage section and the second special pattern storage section, and the special pattern display result. A special system that determines (pre-determines) whether or not the fluctuating display result of a special symbol or performance symbol is a "jackpot" based on numerical data indicating a random value for judgment before the fluctuating display result is derived and displayed. Execute normal symbol processing. In other words, when starting the variable display of the special figure game, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to derive and display the jackpot display result as the display result of the variable display, based on the random number stored when the starting winning occurred. Execute the process of determining (lottery).

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
Next, the back structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 3 to 7. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a left side view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing a gaming machine frame to which a gaming board is attached. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing the pachinko game machine as viewed diagonally from behind. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. Note that illustration of the glass door frame 50 is omitted in FIGS. 5 to 7.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 7, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a game board 2, a game machine frame 3 on which the game board 2 is removably provided, and a game machine frame 3 with the left side of the game machine frame 3 as the center. It has a glass door frame 50 that is provided to be openable and closable in the front of the machine frame 3, and a square frame-shaped outer frame 60 that supports the game machine frame 3 centering on the left side so that it can be opened and closed. By fixing the outer frame 60 to a game island (not shown) installed in the game island, it can be installed on the game island.

At the upper back side of the gaming machine frame 3, a replenishing device 150 (FIGS. 3 and 4 A ball tank forming part 201 forms a storage part capable of storing game balls supplied through the ball tank forming part 201, and a first guiding path is formed to guide the game balls stored in the ball tank forming part 201 toward the left side. A first guide passage forming part 202 and a first passage forming body 203 are provided to extend in the left-right direction along the upper side 3A of the gaming machine frame 3. Furthermore, a terminal board 210, which will be described later, is provided above the first guide path forming section 202.

The replenishment device 150 includes a guiding member 150A that includes a nozzle or the like that can guide game balls in the circulation path of the game island, and a system that sends out a predetermined number (for example, 10, etc.) of game balls guided by the guiding member 150A. A sprocket (not shown) that can drive the sprocket, a drive source (not shown) that drives the sprocket, and a sprocket (not shown) that can be pressed against the gaming machine frame 3 when the opening of the outer frame 60 is in the closed state closed by the gaming machine frame 3. When the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the gaming machine frame 3 in the closed state, the game ball sent out by the sprocket is transferred to the ball tank forming part 201. When the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the open state, the game ball sent out by the sprocket is held so that it cannot fall. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming section 201 decreases when the outer frame 60 is in the closed state, the sprocket is rotated by the drive source and a predetermined number of game balls are sent out to the ball tank forming section 201. is being supplied to. In addition, in the replenishing device 150, a case body 150B is constructed by assembling a plurality of members using a plurality of screw members (not shown), and the case body 150B is constructed by assembling a plurality of members using a plurality of screw members (not shown). It is fixed at a predetermined location.

In addition, a second guiding passage forming part 204 forms a second guiding passage that guides the game ball guided to the left side by the first guiding passage forming part 202 downward, and a game ball guided by the second guiding passage forming part 204 is provided. A dispensing device 200 forming a dispensing unit capable of dispensing balls, and a dispensing passage for guiding game balls dispensed by the dispensing device 200 to an upper tray, that is, dispensing game balls to a player. In order to discharge the game balls guided by the payout passage forming part 205 and the second guiding passage forming part 204 from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming part 205 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1, A second passage forming body 207 comprising a ball extraction passage forming part 206 that forms a ball extraction passage guiding to a discharge part (not shown) provided at the lower part of the back side of the machine 1 is connected to the gaming machine frame 3. It extends in the vertical direction along the left side of the back surface.

The payout device 200 consists of a case body formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and inside includes a sprocket for paying out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one ball), a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, and a game ball. A switching valve capable of switching the ball flow path between a dispensing passage and a ball extraction passage, an operating lever for switching the switching valve, and the like are provided. Furthermore, a board case 91A in which a power supply board 91 is housed, a board case 37A in which a payout control board 37 is housed, and the like are provided at the lower part of the back of the gaming machine frame 3.

In this embodiment, a ball-out switch (not shown) capable of detecting game balls is provided at a predetermined location in the second guide path, and the CPU 103 receives a detection signal from the ball-out switch (not shown). Based on the input state, it is constantly monitored whether or not there are game balls to be put out in the second guide path on the upstream side of the payout device 200. If the off state of the ball out switch (not shown) continues for a predetermined period of time or more, it is determined that the game balls are not being supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason such as ball jamming, that is, a replenishment error has occurred, and the ball is put out. The dispensing operation by the device 200 is stopped. In addition, by displaying a replenishment error on a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11 and outputting a replenishment error command to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 can display the glass door frame 50. It is possible to execute notification processing that a replenishment error has occurred by, for example, causing a game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined location on the front surface to emit light in an error manner.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 2 is removably disposed in an opening 221 formed in the approximate center of the game machine frame 3 from the front side of the game machine frame 3. The game board 2 includes a plate-like body 2a consisting of the above-mentioned board face plate and spacer members, various game parts (for example, obstacle nails, prize winning devices, etc.) provided on the front side of the plate-like body 2a, and the plate-like body 2a. Electronic components such as the image display device 5 provided on the back side, the production device having the movable body 32, the board case 12A in which the production control board 12 is housed, the board case 11A in which the main board 11 is housed, and plate-shaped The structure includes a cover body 220 that protects the performance device, electronic components, etc.

Note that the board cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are constructed by a base member made of a transparent synthetic resin material and a cover member so that each board can be stored therein. , are attached to the gaming machine frame 3 or the gaming board 2 by one or more screw members N20, N21 (see FIG. 3), respectively, and the board cases 91A, 37A are attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by locking means (not shown). Or attached to the game board 2. The cover body 220 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material into a box shape with an open front, and a part of the back is an opening/closing part 220A that can be rotated around the right side. The parts can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, the first passage forming body 203, the second passage forming body 207 provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 3, and the cover body 220 constituting the back side of the gaming board 2 are When the outer frame 60 is closed by the machine frame 3, it protrudes further rearward than the outer frame 60. In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided such that the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming part 201 is located at the rear position of the upper plate of the outer frame 60 at the upper back surface of the gaming machine frame 3. With the outer frame 60 of the game machine 1 fixed to a game island (not shown), game balls can be supplied from the circulation path above the game island to the ball tank forming section 201 via the supply device 150. .

(Mounting structure of first passage forming body 203)
Next, the attachment structure of the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 will be explained based on FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting structure of the passage forming body to the gaming machine frame. FIG. 9 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper rear side of the gaming machine frame.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the gaming machine frame 3 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with an opening 221 for attaching the gaming board 2. A reinforcing metal plate 222 is provided on the back surface of the upper side portion 3A so as to face in the left-right direction. Furthermore, a mounting member 223 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 is attached to the back surface of the metal plate 222.

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material so that it can cover the metal plate 222 from the back side, and screw members N1 to N5, which are attached from the back side to a plurality of mounting holes H1 to H5 facing in the front-rear direction, are attached to the metal plate 222. It is attached to the metal plate 222 by screwing into a plurality of formed screw holes, respectively. On the right side of the mounting member 223, a plate-shaped first protrusion 224 is provided to protrude rearward, and on the left side of the mounting member 223, there is a top wall 225A, a rear wall 225B, and left and right side walls 225C. A three-dimensional second protrusion 225 is provided to protrude rearward.

The first protruding part 224 protrudes rearward from a lower position than the upper wall part 225A of the second protruding part 225, and the spherical tank forming part 201 is disposed above the first protruding part 224. Further, the first guide passage forming part 202 is arranged on the rear side of the rear wall part 225B of the second protruding part 225, and a board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is mounted above it. ing. The board mounting frame 211 is mounted from the back side into the mounting hole H6 formed at the top with the locking piece 212 protruding downward from the lower side inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the attachment member 223 by screwing the screw member N6 into the screw hole formed in the attachment member 223.

In this way, the mounting member 223 is formed to cover the upper side of the game board 2 by having the first protrusion 224 and the second protrusion 225 that protrude rearward. Therefore, game balls and the like supplied to the ball tank forming section 201 from the upper part of the game island are prevented from entering the game board 2. In other words, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2.

The first passage forming body 203 has screw members N11 to N14 attached to the plurality of attachment holes H11 to H14 from the back side, and screw members N15 attached to the attachment hole H15 from the upper side. They are attached to the attachment member 223 by being screwed into the respective screw holes. Note that the screw member N12 attached to the attachment hole H12 is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire 226 to the first passage forming body 203 for removing electricity charged in the first passage forming body 203. Moreover, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper part of the first passage forming body 203. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing the screw member N16 attached from above into the attachment hole H16 into the screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage forming body 203. There is.

As shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 8, the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 described above are composed of a male screw portion NS and a head NH. This is a flanged screw with a flange part F as a locking part integrally formed on the seat surface of the screw, and by widening the ground contact area of the seat surface and increasing the frictional force, it is less likely to loosen compared to screw members N3 to N6. It is a screw member.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of each screw member N1 to N6, N11 to N16 is approximately 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is approximately 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is approximately 1 to 3 mm. The length is about 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2.

Incidentally, the sizes and types of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arbitrary, and the dimensions of the diameters L1 to L3 are not limited to the above dimensions. Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16, which are made of flanged screws, are screw members in which a flange portion F (washer) is integrally formed, but instead of the flange portion F, a washer separate from the screw member is used. It may be attached by attaching it to a screw member, and the flange portion F and the washer constitute the locking portion of the present invention. Further, the screw member includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that, when loosened, separates from the attached part. Further, the locking portion includes a locking portion of the head NH that is formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the head NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first passage forming body 203 needs to receive and store game balls supplied from above the game island in the ball tank forming part 201, and the first guiding passage It is formed in a concave shape with an open top surface so that ball clogging is less likely to occur, and if ball clogging occurs, it can be easily cleared.

In addition, a first cover body 310 and a second cover body 320 cover the upper surface of a portion where game balls stacked in the vertical direction in the ball tank forming portion 201 flow into the first guide path forming portion 202. In addition, a third cover body 330 is disposed to cover the upper surface of the part where the flow flows from the first guide passage forming part 202 to the second guide passage forming part 204, so that the game ball is now rectified. However, although a part of the upper surface opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered by the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330, the spherical tank forming part 201 and the uncovered area 350 ( (see FIG. 27) is open.

On the other hand, near the periphery of the first passage forming body 203, a plurality of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arranged to be attached to the gaming machine frame 3 and the attachment member 223. Further, above the pachinko game machine 1 fixed to the game island, there are screw members (not shown) for assembling the frame that constitutes the game island, and various devices arranged inside the game island (for example, A large number of screw members (not shown) for attaching the replenishment device 150, etc. to the frame, etc., and a plurality of screw members for assembling the plurality of members constituting the case bodies of various devices are arranged.

If these screw members loosen and fall out due to vibrations or shocks occurring in the game island or the pachinko game machine 1, they may roll due to the vibrations, shocks, or opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, and the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first There is a possibility that the balls may fall into the interior from the uncovered area 350 of the guide path forming portion 202 and enter the guide path of the game ball. In particular, the replenishing device 150 and the like are arranged directly above and near the ball tank forming section 201 as shown in FIGS. Because this device is prone to vibration when new game balls are supplied from the circulation path or when the game machine frame 3 is opened and closed, screw members ( (not shown) or a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body 150B of the replenishing device 150 become loose due to vibration and fall off, inside the ball tank forming part 201 or the first guide passage forming part 202. There is a very high possibility that it will fall.

If the screw member falls into the ball tank forming part 201 or the first guide passage forming part 202, it may move toward the payout device 200 side as the game balls flow down, and eventually get mixed into the payout device 200. If the screw member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the sprocket or switching valve may be damaged by the screw member, balls may become clogged and the payout motor may be overloaded and malfunction, or the screw member may be damaged along with the game balls by the player. There is a risk that the player will be paid out, giving the player a sense of discomfort or distrust.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as will be explained below, the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming part 202 may get mixed into the payout device 200 and cause the payout device 200 to be damaged or malfunction, or the screw member may be lost together with the game ball. Various measures have been taken to prevent players from paying out money.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be explained based on FIGS. 10 to 16. In FIG. 10, (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. 11, (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10(A), (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 10(A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. It is a diagram. In FIG. 12, (A) is a plan view showing the first guide passage forming part, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line DD in (A). In FIG. 13, (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE in (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF in (A). In FIG. 14, (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in (A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line H-H in (A). 15, (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line II in (A), (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line J-J in (A), and (D) is a top view showing the third cover body. 3 is a perspective view showing the cover body, and (E) is a perspective view showing the ball stopper member. 16, (A) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming part showing the state where the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a longitudinal sectional view showing the state where the ball stopper member is in the second state. FIG. 3 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a guide passage forming part.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material and has a bottom wall portion 203A and a standing wall portion 203B standing on the periphery of the bottom wall portion 203A. It is formed in the shape of a concave or groove with an opening, and has a spherical tank forming part 201 disposed on the right side and a first guide passage forming part 202 disposed on the left side. The spherical tank forming part 201 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape in plan view, and the first guide passage forming part 202 is connected to an upstream part extending diagonally backward from the left side of the spherical tank forming part 201 and a downstream part extending in the left-right direction. Become. The dimension of the ball tank forming part 201 in the longitudinal direction is longer than the dimension of the first guiding passage forming part 202 in the longitudinal direction, so that it can store more game balls than the first guiding passage forming part 202. has been done. Furthermore, since the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to be gradually inclined downward from the left side of the spherical tank forming portion 201 toward the right side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the bottom wall portion 203A is The game balls are designed to naturally flow down the ball tank forming part 201 and the first guide passage forming part 202 toward the left side.

A mounting piece 261 that faces in the vertical direction is protruded from the outer surface of the standing wall part 203B on the right side of the spherical tank forming part 201, and mounting holes H11 and H12 that face in the front-back direction are formed in the mounting piece 261 at the top and bottom. . Further, a mounting piece 265 is provided protruding from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction is formed in the mounting piece 265. A mounting piece 262 facing in the up-down direction is provided on the outer surface of the left vertical wall part 203B of the first guide passage forming part 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 is provided on the outer surface of the upstream wall portion 203B on the front side of the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to protrude forward. A mounting piece 263 is erected on the front side of the horizontal wall portion 264, and a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 263.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by screwing the plurality of screw members N11 to N15 attached to the attachment holes H11 to H15 into the screw holes formed in the attachment member 223. Further, a recess 280 having a substantially rectangular shape in plan view is formed on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264 near the rear of the mounting piece 263 .

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, holes 270A and 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall section 203A and the rear vertical wall section 203B at the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming section 202. (See FIG. 11(A)). A plurality of holes 271A to 271H are formed downstream of the holes 271A and 271B at substantially the center in the front-rear direction of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A and 271B. Furthermore, a communication hole 272 for dropping a game ball into the second guide passage forming part 204 below is formed to penetrate through the bottom wall part 203A of the downstream end of the first guiding passage forming part 202. .

A meandering part 273 is formed in the middle of the first guide passage forming part 202, which causes the game ball to flow down to the left side while meandering in the front-back direction, and among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, holes 271B to 271F are formed. is formed at a position corresponding to the meandering portion 273. By providing such a meandering portion 273, the ball pressure caused by the following ball is prevented from increasing.

In addition, the distance L10 between the lower portions of the standing walls 203B and 203B before and after the first guide passage forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (approximately 11 mm) of the game ball, and is twice the diameter 2R (approximately 22 mm). (11mm<L10<22mm). In other words, the first guide passage forming section 202 is formed so as to be able to guide the game balls in one row toward the downstream side.

Since the longitudinal dimension L11 of the holes 271A to 271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B is slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N3 to N6 described above (L11>L2), as will be described later, Even if N6 gets mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw members N3 to N6 can fall from the holes 271A to 271H. In addition, since the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest left-right dimension L12 (dimension in the downstream direction of the game ball) compared to the other holes 271A to 271G, screw members N3 to N6 are connected to the communication hole 271H. It is possible to reliably make it fall out of the first guide passage forming part 202 before it reaches.

In other words, these holes 271A to 271H constitute a specific restriction part for restricting the movement of the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 to the dispensing device 200. Incidentally, dirt and dust other than the screw members, or some other members can also fall from these plurality of holes 271A to 271H, so that clogging of the ball due to these can be prevented.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in FIGS. 13(A) to 13(C), the first cover body 310 extends along the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side of the spherical tank forming portion 201, and the upper end of the standing wall portion 203B A mounting part 311 having a downward U-shape in cross section that can be fitted from above to the mounting part 311; a standing wall part 312 extending from the right side of the mounting part 311 toward the rear side; A plate-shaped ball holding part 313 that extends downwardly toward the section 201 side), a cover section 314 that extends from the lower part of the vertical wall section 312 toward the left side (first guide passage forming section 202 side), and It is mainly composed of a plurality of locking parts 315A to 315D that are elastically deformably formed on the front side of the part 311 and the front and rear sides of the cover part 314.

The first cover body 310 configured in this manner has the mounting portion 311 attached to the spherical tank forming portion 201 with the vertical wall portion 312 disposed near the boundary between the spherical tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202. By fitting the upper end of the front wall portion 203B from above, the plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D are elastically locked to a locked portion 317 (see FIG. 18) formed on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B. By doing so, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203. In the attached state, the ball holding part 313 is arranged to cover a part of the downstream side of the ball tank forming part 201 from above, and the cover part 314 covers a part of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming part 202. The cover part 314 is arranged so that the upper surface of the cover part 314 is slightly inclined downward toward the first guide passage forming part 202 (see FIG. 9).

When the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the ball holding part 313 is arranged on the ball tank forming part 201 side, so that the ball holding part 313 is placed on the ball tank forming part 201 side from the game island (not shown) to the ball tank forming part 201. Even when the supplied game balls are stored so as to be stacked in the vertical direction, when the game balls flow down to the first guide passage forming part 202 side, they are held down by the ball holding part 313 and the flow is rectified. It is now possible to do so.

In the cover portion 314, long holes 316A to 316C extending in the left-right direction and having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view are formed to penetrate vertically and are arranged in a row parallel to each other. Each of the elongated holes 316A to 316C has the same front-to-back dimension L21, which is shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and the heads of the aforementioned screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16. It is shorter than the diameter L2 of NH (L21<2R, L21<L2). That is, the elongated holes 316A to 316C are formed in a size that prevents the game balls and screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 from falling. Note that reinforcing ribs are suspended from the periphery of each of the elongated holes 316A to 316C on the lower surface of the cover portion 314.

In addition, since the long holes 316A to 316C extend along the downward direction of the game ball, the game ball P falls onto the upper part of the long holes 316A to 316C, as shown in FIGS. 13(B) and 13(C). In this case, the game ball P can be moved in the downstream direction (left side).

(Second cover body 320)
As shown in FIGS. 14(A) to 14(C), the second cover body 320 includes a plate-shaped cover portion 324 formed along the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and a cover portion The right end of the cover part 324 is connected to the left end of the cover part 314 of the first cover body 310. The plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B elastically lock onto the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 302B in a state in which the first passage forming body 203 is brought close to each other. mounted on. In the attached state, the cover part 324 covers a part of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming part 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward in the downstream direction of the game ball (Fig. 9 reference).

Concave grooves 326A to 326C extending in the left-right direction are formed on the upper surface of the cover portion 324 and are arranged in a row. The respective grooves 326A to 326C have different longitudinal dimensions L22A to L22C, but are each shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball (L22A to L22C<2R). Note that the longitudinal dimension L22B of the central groove 326B, which has the longest longitudinal dimension, is longer than the diameter L2 of the heads NH of the aforementioned screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 (L22B>L2). That is, the concave groove 326B is formed in a size that cannot accommodate the game balls, but can accommodate the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16. Further, the longitudinal dimension L22B of the groove 326B is longer than the longitudinal dimension L21 of the elongated holes 316A to 316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B>L21).

In addition, the front-rear dimension L22A of the groove 326A and the front-rear dimension L22C of the groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 (L22B>L1, L22C>L1 ), is sized to accommodate at least the male threaded portion NS.

In addition, the grooves 326A to 326C extend along the downward direction of the game ball and are arranged so as to be inclined downward in the downward direction of the game ball, so that the grooves 326A to 326C shown in FIGS. As shown in , when the game ball P falls onto the upper part of the grooves 326A to 326C, the game ball P is guided in the downstream direction (left side).

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in FIGS. 15(A) to 15(C) and FIG. 16, the third cover body 330 includes a plate-shaped cover portion 334 formed along the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. , a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D that are formed to be elastically deformable on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334, and a screw member N15 protruding between the locking portions 335C and 335D on the back surface and attached from above; It mainly consists of a mounting part 331 in which a hole H15 is formed and a ball stopper member 340 provided at the left end of the upper surface of the cover part 334, and the plurality of locking parts 335A to 335D at the left end of the cover part 324 are connected to a vertical wall. At the same time, the threaded member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 is screwed into the threaded hole provided on the outer surface of the vertical wall part 203B. By inserting it, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203. In the attached state, the cover part 334 covers the downstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward in the downstream direction of the game balls (see FIG. 9).

The cover portion 334 extends obliquely upward from the left side to the right side, and has a recessed portion 336 having a predetermined depth extending from the right end portion of the upper surface toward the left side. A part of the right side approaches the meandering portion 273, and is therefore formed in accordance with the shape of the meandering portion 273. Furthermore, a slit 337 having a horizontally long U-shape in plan view is formed at a position corresponding to the recess 336, thereby forming a rectifying plate 338 whose left end side can be elastically deformed so as to swing in the vertical direction. By forming an inclined plate part 339 that slopes downward toward the right side at the right end part, the game balls P stacked up and down can be leveled while guiding them to be pressed toward the bottom wall part 203A. (See Figure 16).

The longitudinal dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and is also longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16 (L23 >2R, L23>L2). That is, the recess 336 is formed in a size that can accommodate the game ball P and the heads NH of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16. Further, the front-to-back dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-to-back dimension L22B of the groove 326B of the cover part 324 (L23>L22B).

In addition, since the recess 336 extends along the downward direction of the game ball and is arranged to be inclined downward in the downward direction of the game ball, the recess 336 When the game ball P falls to the top of 336, the game ball P is guided in the downstream direction (left side).

In addition, the front-rear dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 (L24<L2), so that ~N16 will not fall from the slit 337.

The ball stopper member 340 includes a plate-shaped front wall portion 341A having a substantially triangular shape in rear view, a rear wall portion 341B disposed on the back side of the front wall portion 341A, and a front wall portion 341A and a rear wall portion 341B. It is composed of a rotating part 341 having a connecting left wall part 341C and a projecting wall part 341D projecting from the upper end of the left wall part 341C, and a cylindrical shaft part 342 facing in the front-rear direction. Bearing parts 343A and 343B that rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft part 342 are erected on the left side of the upper surface of the cover part 334. Furthermore, a slit 344 into which the front wall portion 341A can be inserted is formed on the right side of the bearing portion 343A in the cover portion 334.

As shown in FIG. 16, when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the upper part of the downstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202 is covered by the cover part 324. Since the cover part 324 is arranged so as to be inclined downward so as to approach the bottom wall part 203A toward the downstream side (left side), the cover part 324 protects the game balls P stacked vertically in the first guide passage forming part 202. The fluid is leveled while flowing down, and finally it is made to flow out one by one from the communication hole 272. In particular, the rectifying plate 338 is elastically deformable when the game balls come into contact with it, so that it smoothes the game balls by pressing them downward to the extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball stopper member 340)
As shown in FIG. 16(A), the ball stopper member 340 is rotatable between an upright position where the rotating portion 341 stands upward and a tilted position where the rotating portion 341 is tilted to the right. is located in the upright position and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game balls in the first guide path forming portion 202 to flow down into the second guide path forming portion 204; The part 341 is located in the tilted position, the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 cannot flow down (or cannot flow down) into the second guide path forming part 204. It is possible to change to a second state (difficult), that is, a ball-stopping state.

By setting the ball stopper member 340 in the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of game balls into the second guide passage forming part 204, so in this state, the game ball inside the second guiding passage forming part 204 can be controlled. It becomes possible to extract the ball and remove the dispensing device 200 for inspection or replacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16(A), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating part 341 is opened and consists of a front wall part 341A, a rear wall part 341B, and a left wall part 341C. The space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall in plan view functions as a retention portion in which the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can reside, as will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16(B), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the rotating part 341 is tilted, but the projecting wall part 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage. Therefore, as will be described later, the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained on the right side of the projecting wall portion 341D.

(Terminal board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described based on FIG. 17 and with reference to FIG. 8. In FIG. 17, (A) is a perspective view showing the board mounting frame to which the terminal board is attached, (B) is a KK cross section of (A), and (C) is a LL cross section of (B). .

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 17, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and has a cable connection section (not shown) on the back where a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11 etc. is attached/detached. ) and a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection holes 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 3) connected to an external device such as a hall computer. Connection pinches (not shown) for pinching the tips of the cables C are provided at positions corresponding to the connection holes 231 inside the mounting member 232. A spring (not shown) is provided to bias the connecting pinch in the direction of closing, that is, in the direction of pinching the tip of the cable C. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operation parts 233 for opening each connection pinch (not shown) against the biasing force of a spring (not shown).

The number of cables C that can be connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming part 202 is a first number (for example, 20). On the other hand, each signal line is also connected to second boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 provided below the first guide path forming part 202, but the second board, which has a smaller number than the first number, number (for example, 10).

A plurality of operating sections 233 are provided corresponding to each of the connection holes 231, have a substantially hook shape when viewed from the side, and are swung back and forth with the base end thereof as a swiveling axis. When the aforementioned connection pinch (not shown) is released, the connection pinch (not shown) is released by pressing the operation part 233 upward or downward and swinging the operation part 233. Then, when the tip of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole 231 with the connection pinch open and the pressing operation of the operation part 233 is stopped, the connection pinch is closed by the biasing force of a spring (not shown). Cable C is now held. The operating sections 233 arranged in the left-right direction have alternately different shapes in the left-right direction so that when a predetermined operating section 233 is pressed, adjacent operating sections 233 do not interfere with the pressing operation. There is.

The board mounting frame 211 is mounted from the back side into the mounting hole H6 formed at the top with the locking piece 212 protruding downward from the lower side inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the attachment member 223 by screwing the screw member N6 into the screw hole formed in the attachment member 223. Further, the board mounting frame 211 has an opening 234 in the shape of a horizontally long rectangle.

On the inner surface of the board mounting frame 211, there are a plurality of regulating parts 235 that restrict the forward movement of the terminal board 210 by locking on the peripheral edge of the terminal board 210 inserted from the front side, and a plurality of regulating parts 235 that restrict the forward movement of the terminal board 210. A plurality of locking portions 236 that can be elastically locked from the front side to the peripheral edge of the terminal board 210 whose movement is restricted, and a positioning piece 237 that comes into contact with the peripheral edge of the terminal board 210 to determine the arrangement position. have Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and the board is mounted by being elastically locked by the locking part 236 while the forward movement is restricted by the plurality of restriction parts 235. It is attached to the frame 211. In other words, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 using a plurality of restricting parts 235 and locking parts 236 as mounting means different from screw members (by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members). Installed.

Since the terminal board 210 is formed with a plurality of connection holes 231 to which cables C can be connected, during wiring work to connect a plurality of cables C to the connection holes 231, the operation section 233 corresponding to each cable C is connected to the terminal board 210. need to be operated. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island, when a clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 for inspection etc., the cable C hanging from the top of the game island is connected to the outer frame. 60, tension may be applied to the connection part. In other words, the terminal board 210 is easily subject to load on the mounting portion, and if it is mounted to the board mounting frame 211 or the mounting member 223 using screw members, the thread member may loosen and come off easily. ing.

Furthermore, when the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211, the connection hole 231 and the operation part 233 of the terminal board 210 face the back side through the opening 234 (see FIG. 17(A)). ). Further, since the plurality of operation parts 233 protrude rearward substantially horizontally, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the plurality of operation parts 233 arranged side by side on the left and right, as described later. Furthermore, a recess 242 is formed between the lower part of the terminal board 210 and the front part of the board mounting frame 211, in which the screw members N3 to N6 can be accommodated.

(Installation status of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting state of the screw members N1 to N16 will be explained based on FIGS. 18 to 21. FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing the periphery of the ball tank section on the back side of the game frame as seen diagonally from behind. In FIG. 19, (A) is a plan view showing the vicinity of the ball tank portion on the back side of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in (A). FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back side of the game frame as viewed diagonally from behind. FIG. 21 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide path forming section on the back side of the game frame. 22, (A) is a sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing the rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 21. In FIG. 23, (A) is a sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 21, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line QQ in FIG. FIG. 24 is a sectional view taken along the line RR in FIG. 21. FIG. 25 is a sectional view taken along the line SS in FIG. 21. 26, (A) is the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper member is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper member in the second state. (D) is a sectional view taken along line U-U in (C) when the screw member is in a retained state. FIG. 27 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the movement of the screw member. FIG. 28 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming part showing the moving state of the game ball on the cover part.

As shown in FIG. 9, FIG. 18, and FIG. 19(A), screw members N1 to 223 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 are provided at the ball tank forming portion 201 and its surroundings on the back side of the gaming machine frame 3. N2 and screw members N11, N12, and N15 for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the attachment member 223 are attached.

Specifically, the screw members N1 and N2 are attached toward the front from the back side at a position apart from the spherical tank forming part 201 to the right and below the upper edge of the vertical wall part 203B in the spherical tank forming part 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N1 and N2 loosen due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and fall out backwards, there is a very low possibility that they will fall into the ball tank forming part 201 as shown in FIG. .

Because the screw members N11 and N12 are attached to the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the spherical tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the spherical tank forming portion 201, from the back side toward the front. Even if the screw members N11 and N12 loosen and fall out backwards due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of them falling into the ball tank forming part 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

The screw member N15 is attached from the top to the bottom on the outer surface of the right standing wall 203B of the ball tank forming part 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the ball tank forming part 201, so that the pachinko game Even if the screw member N15 becomes loose due to vibration or shock generated in the machine 1 and falls off upward, the possibility of it falling into the spherical tank forming part 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 form a ball tank that receives and stores game balls supplied by the supply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island, and receives the load of a large number of game balls. Since vibrations and shocks are likely to occur due to the arrangement around the portion 201, a flanged screw member is used, which has a large ground contact area with the attached portion and is difficult to loosen.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the spherical tank forming part 201 are located at positions where they are unlikely to fall into the spherical tank forming part 201 even if they become loose and fall out, that is, the upper surface opening of the spherical tank forming part 201. Since the balls are disposed lower than the game island, there is no chance that the balls will get mixed into the ball tank forming part 201, which is open at the top to receive and store game balls supplied by the supply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island. suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19(B), the spherical tank forming portion 201 is close to (or may be in contact with) the upper surface side of the plate-shaped first protruding portion 224 that protrudes rearward on the mounting member 223. The gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first protrusion 224 is shorter than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the threaded member (L30<L1). There is almost no possibility that the screw member will be caught between the wall portion 203A and the first protruding portion 224 and held near the spherical tank forming portion 201.

Moreover, the gap L31 formed between the rear part of the bottom wall part 203A of the spherical tank forming part 201 and the top wall part 220H of the cover body 220 is larger than the head L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange part F. Since the flanged screw member is also long (L3>L2), it is almost impossible for the flanged screw member to be caught in the gap L31 and held near the spherical tank forming portion 201.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19(B), if the screw member N15 falls off from the mounting hole H15 as the mounted part and falls onto the upper wall part 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall part 220H Since the screw member N15 is tilted downward toward the back side, the fallen screw member N15 flows down either to the rear or to the left, so it is almost never held in the vicinity of the spherical tank forming part 201. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fallen screw member N15 from getting into each of the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A provided below the ball tank forming part 201 and coming into contact with the wiring of the board and causing disconnection, etc. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9, 20, and 21(A), screw members N3 to N5 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 and the board A screw member N6 for attaching the mounting frame 211 to the attaching member 223, screw members N13 and N14 for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the attaching member 223, and a third cover body 330 are attached to the first guide passage forming part 202. A screw member N16 for attaching to is attached.

Specifically, the screw members N3 to N6 are separated from the first guide passage forming part 202 to the front side and are directed forward from the back side at a position above the upper end edge of the vertical wall part 203B in the first guide passage forming part 202. In addition, the second protruding portion 225 of the mounting member 223 is disposed between the mounting position of each of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member Although there is a certain distance from the mounting position of each of N3 to N6 to the first guide passage forming portion 202, the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is inclined downward toward the back side, so that the pachinko game machine If the screw members N3 to N6 become loose due to the vibration or shock generated in the first part and fall out backward, they move backward on the upper wall part 225A of the second protruding part 225, as shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that it will fall into the guide passage forming part 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the screw member N3 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position that is spaced forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. It is attached to the mounting hole H3. Further, at a position corresponding to the mounting hole H3 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, a groove 227 is formed in a straight line toward the rear to avoid interference with the head NH when installing the screw member N3 to the mounting hole H3. It has been extended to Note that the groove 227 is formed so that the left and right width tapers toward the rear side and becomes shallower. The bottom surface of 227 is approximately horizontal (or slightly inclined downward toward the back side).

Therefore, if the screw member N3 becomes loose due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and falls off backward, there is a high possibility that it will fall into the groove 227 on the upper wall 225A of the second protrusion 225 (Fig. 22(A)). Further, the screw member N3 that has fallen into the groove 227 is likely to be guided to move linearly toward the rear when vibration or impact occurs, but since the groove 227 is substantially horizontal toward the rear. , the screw member N3 is less likely to move rearward than in areas other than the groove 227. In other words, the groove 227 constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the screw member N3 moving toward the first guide passage forming part 202 from falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202.

Here, all screw members including the screw member N3 are composed of a head NH and a male threaded portion NS, so that when falling onto the upper surface of the flat upper wall portion 225A, the periphery of the head NH and the male threaded portion NS Since the screw member N3 is often tilted with two points in contact with the tip (see Figure 22(A)), the screw member N3 tilted as shown in Figure 22(B) is subject to vibrations and shocks. Sometimes, the head NH rotates and changes its direction around the tip of the male threaded portion NS. Therefore, if it falls onto a flat surface other than the groove 227 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, or if it deviates from the rear end of the groove 227, it may move linearly rearward or the head may fall. The NH may turn to the left or right by shaking its head. That is, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 20, if it moves rearward and curves to the right, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the first cover body 310, and if it moves rearward in a straight line, it will most likely fall on the first cover body 310. There is a high possibility that the object will fall onto the second cover body 320, and if it moves backward and curves to the left, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the horizontal wall section 264 in front of the first guide path.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the groove 227 and then moves rearward to bend to the right, the first cover body There is a high possibility that it will fall onto the cover part 314 of 310. As shown in FIG. 22(A), when the screw member N3 falls onto the cover part 314, the screw member N3 is tilted so that the male thread part NS intersects with the long holes 316A to 316C, or the male thread part NS is Although the head NH is inserted into any of the elongated holes 316A to 316C, it is locked without falling off, so that it stays on the cover part 314 without falling from the cover part 314 into the first guide passage forming part 202. I will do it. In other words, the long holes 316A to 316C prevent the screw member N3, which has fallen onto the cover part 314 provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202, from falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a predetermined restriction section for restriction.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the groove 227 is guided to the rear end and then moved linearly toward the rear, the cover part 324 of the second cover body 320 or the first passage There is a high possibility that the object will fall onto the horizontal wall 264 of the body 203. As shown in FIG. 22(C), when the screw member N3 falls onto the cover part 324, the screw member N3 is tilted so that the male thread part NS intersects with the grooves 326A to 326C, or the male thread part NS and Since a part of the head NH is accommodated in the grooves 326A to 326C, it stays on the cover part 324 without falling from the cover part 324 into the first guide passage forming part 202. In other words, the grooves 326A to 326C prevent the screw member N3, which has fallen onto the cover part 324 provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202, from falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a predetermined restriction section for restriction.

In addition, if the second protruding portion 225 falls onto the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guiding passage forming portion 202, Remains in a tilted state. In other words, the horizontal wall portion 264 side is disposed below the upper end edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the upper wall portion 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B, and the horizontal wall portion 264 form a recessed portion 290 that is open at the top, so that it is accommodated and retained within this recessed portion 290. In other words, the recess 290 is provided between the mounting hole H3 around the first guide passage forming part 202 and the first guiding passage forming part 202, and the recess 290 is a screw member that has moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the fall of N3 to the first guide passage forming part 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, in the first passage forming body 203, the screw member N13 is spaced forward from the upstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202 and slightly above the upper edge of the vertical wall part 203B. It is attached to the attachment hole H13 formed in the attachment piece 263, which is the position. Therefore, if the screw member N13 becomes loose due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and falls off backward, there is a possibility that it will fall into the recess 280 formed near the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264. high (see FIG. 23(A)). Specifically, the horizontal wall portion 264 is disposed below the upper edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the upper wall portion 225A, a recess 280 smaller than the recess 290 is formed in the vicinity of the mounting hole H13 in the recess 290 that is open at the top by the vertical wall 203B and the horizontal wall 264, so that the recess 280 is accommodated and retained in the recess 280. Become.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23(B), if the screw member N13 loosens and falls off backward due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the screw member N13 located at the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264 It may fall and stay in the recess 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211. In other words, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13 around the first guide passage forming part 202 and the first guiding passage forming part 202, and the recess 214 is a screw member that has moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the N13 from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N4 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position that is spaced forward from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B. It is attached to the mounting hole H4. Therefore, if the screw member N4 loosens and falls off backward due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall 225A of the second protrusion 225 (see FIG. 24).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21, and 24, when the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H4 moves rearward to the right, when it moves rearward in a straight line, when it moves backward In either case, as shown in FIG. 24, when the board mount frame 211 moves to the right, it falls from the top wall 225A and from the rear end of the top wall 211H of the board mounting frame 211. The screw member N4 that has fallen from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H enters the inside through the opening 234 and is accommodated and retained in the recess 242 formed by the board mounting frame 211 and the terminal board 210, or the screw member N4 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. Although the male threaded portion NS is inserted into the recessed portion 243 formed between the vertical wall portion 211 and the vertical wall portion 203B, there is a possibility that the head portion NH is retained without falling off. In other words, the recess 242 and the recess 243 are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming part 202 and the first guiding passage forming part 202, and are moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202. It constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the fall of the threaded member N4 to the first guide passage forming part 202.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 24, when the screw member N4 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the plurality of operation parts 233. Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island, a plurality of cables C connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 are suspended from the top of the game island (see FIG. 3), so these cables C may prevent the screw member N4 from falling from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. In other words, the operating section 233 and the cable C are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming part 202 and the first guiding passage forming part 202, and are moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202. This constitutes a special restriction part for restricting the screw member N4 from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202.

In addition, if the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves backward and to the right, and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the first cover body 310, the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the non-covered region 350 provided between the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, which is not covered by either the second cover body 320 or the third cover body 330. to fall. The screw member N4 that has fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side according to the flow of the game ball P and approaches the bottom wall part 203A, It falls through one of the holes 271B to 271D formed at a position corresponding to the non-covered area 350 in the guide passage forming part 202 and is discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming part 202.

Furthermore, even if it does not fall from any of the holes 271B to 271D, it will eventually fall from any of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming section 202. In other words, the holes 271A to 271H constitute a specific restriction part for restricting the movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen into the ball tank forming part 201 or the first guide passage forming part 202 to the dispensing device 200.

On the other hand, if the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves rearward to bend to the left and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the screw member N4 falls onto the recess 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. By falling, it is accommodated and retained in the recess 336 without falling from the cover part 334 into the first guide passage forming part 202. In other words, the recessed portion 336 is designed to restrict the screw member N4 that has fallen onto the cover portion 334 provided to cover a portion of the upper surface of the first guiding path forming portion 202 from falling into the first guiding path forming portion 202. This constitutes a predetermined restriction section.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N6 is formed in the board mounting frame 211 at a position that is spaced forward from the downstream part of the first guide passage forming section 202 and above the upper edge of the vertical wall section 203B. It is attached to the attached attachment hole H6. Therefore, if the screw member N6 becomes loose due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and falls off backward, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see FIG. 25).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21, and 25, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided to move linearly rearward by a plurality of ribs 211A extending rearward. After that, when it moves to the right, it falls to a position near the upstream side of the ball stopper member 340 on the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330, as shown in FIG. As described in FIG. 16, the cover part 334 covers the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming part 202 so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side (dispensing device 200 side). The screw member N6 that has fallen to a position near the upstream side of the ball stopper member 340 in is likely to move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 26, the screw member N6 that has moved to the downstream side contacts the ball stopper member 340 provided at the downstream end (left end) that is the lower inclined side of the cover part 334, and moves downstream ( Since the movement to the left side is restricted, it stays on the cover part 334.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating part 341 is opened, and the front wall part 341A and the rear wall part 341B are opened. Since the screw member N6 can be retained in the space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall portion in plan view consisting of the left wall portion 341C, the screw member N6 can be held without falling from above the cover portion 334. be able to. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 26(C) and 26(D), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is located in an upright state across the passage, so that the screw member N6 is Since the screw member N6 can be retained on the right side of the portion 341D, the screw member N6 can be held without falling from above the cover portion 334.

In the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is only disposed so as to intersect with the inclination direction, and the front and rear sides are open, so there is a possibility that the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted may fall backward or forward. On the other hand, in the first state, the front and left sides of the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted are covered by the front wall 341A, the rear wall 341B, and the left wall 341C, so the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted is It is possible to retain the liquid more reliably than in the second state in which the left wall portion 341C is located only on the left side. That is, the ball stopper member 340 is provided on the dispensing device 200 side in the oblique direction of the cover part 334, and constitutes a specific part that can retain the screw member N6 that has fallen onto the cover part 334 in the cover part 334. are doing.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N5 is located in the mounting member 223 at a position that is away from the downstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202 to the front and right side and is above the upper edge of the vertical wall part 203B. Although it is attached to the formed attachment hole H5, the first guide passage forming part 202 is not arranged directly behind the attachment hole H5, and the upper wall part 225A of the second protrusion 225 is also cut in the middle. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls off backward, it will fall onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second protrusion 225, but before it reaches the first guide passage forming portion 202. There is a high possibility that it will fall from the upper wall portion 225A to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, the screw member N16 is attached to a mounting hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first guide passage forming section 202 and at a position below the upper end edge of the vertical wall section 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out backwards, there is a high possibility that it will fall outside the first guiding passage forming part 202 without falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202. .

(action/effect)
As explained above, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. N3 to N6, etc., become loose due to vibrations or shocks generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and fall out, and after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A due to vibrations, shocks, or opening/closing of the gaming machine frame 3, the cover is removed. When the ball falls onto the parts 314, 324, and 334, the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the grooves 326A to 326C, the recessed part 336, and the ball stopper member 340 restrict the ball from falling to the first guide passage forming part 202. Screws that have fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 are likely to remain on the cover parts 314, 324, 334 without falling from the cover parts 314, 324, 334 into the first guiding passage forming part 202. It is possible to prevent the members from moving and getting mixed into the dispensing device 200. Furthermore, since vertical walls are formed at the left (downstream side) ends of the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C, even if the screw member moves to the left, it will not flow into the first guide passage forming part 202. can be suitably prevented from falling.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28, on the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202, the area other than the non-covered area 350 is covered with cover parts 314, 324, and 334, but the spherical tank forming part 201 Even if the supplied game ball spills and lands on the upstream side cover parts 314, 324, the front and rear dimensions of the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C are smaller than the diameter 2R of the game ball P. Since the game ball P is also narrow, after rolling toward the left side, the game ball P falls from the left end of the cover part 324 to the non-covered area 350 and is returned into the first guide path forming part 202.

Therefore, not only can the game balls that have ridden on the cover parts 314 and 324 be returned to the first guide passage forming part 202, but also the game balls P can stay in the long holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C. As a result, the space in which the fallen screw member N stays is limited, or it comes into contact with the staying game balls and falls from the non-covered area 350 into the first guide path forming part 202. This can be prevented.

In addition, when a game ball falls onto the cover part 334, it either flows down on the cover part 334 toward the left side and is regulated by the ball stopper member 340, or falls outside the first guide path forming part 202. do.

Further, in the long holes 316A to 316C as the first retention part and the grooves 326A to 326C as the second retention part, the groove 326B is provided at a position closer to the dispensing device 200 than the long holes 316A to 316C, The longitudinal dimension L22B is larger than the longitudinal dimension L22 of the long hole 316B (L22B>L21). By doing this, as the screw member approaches the dispensing device 200, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retention part, so the screw member that has fallen onto the cover parts 314, 324 moves and falls into the first guide passage forming part 202. This can be prevented.

On the other hand, the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and remained on the cover parts 314, 324, and 334 are moved due to vibrations, impacts, etc. When falling from the area 350 into the first guide passage forming part 202, or after moving backward on the upper wall part 225A like the screw member N4, the first guide passage forming part 202 from the uncovered area 350 Even if the game ball P falls directly inside, it falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side according to the flow of the game ball P in the first guide path forming part 202, and approaches the bottom wall part 203A. This causes the screw member to fall from any of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming part 202, so that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 moves and enters the dispensing device 200. Contamination can be suppressed.

Further, the plurality of holes 271A to 271H formed in the bottom wall portion 203A are formed from the midstream portion (near the meandering portion 273) to the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and are formed in the spherical tank forming portion 201. There is a region where no holes are formed between the holes 270A, 270B formed in close positions and the hole 271A that is the most upstream of the holes 271A to 271H. In this way, by forming a region in which a plurality of holes are not formed in the upstream part of the first guide passage forming part 202, the game balls from the ball tank forming part 201 are stacked vertically and flow down. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the strength of the bottom wall portion 203A near the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 where ball pressure is applied.

Further, by forming a region in which no hole is formed in the first guide passage forming part 202 in this way, the screw member that has fallen from the first guiding passage forming part 202 is formed on the rear wall part of the cover body 220. Intrusion into the inside of the cover body 220 through the heat dissipation holes 220B (see FIG. 6) and the like can be appropriately suppressed.

Further, by providing the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 at positions corresponding to the areas where holes are not formed in the first guide passage forming part 202, the first guiding passage forming part 202 is provided with a screw member. It is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the first guide path forming part 202 and to prevent the screw member falling into the first guide path forming part 202 from falling outside the first guide path forming part 202 and being mixed into the dispensing device 200. be able to.

Further, the largest hole 271H among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H is provided at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member can be suitably inserted from the hole 271H to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, when a screw member falls from the ball tank forming part 201 or the non-covered area 350 into the first guide passage forming part 202, the game ball does not fall in the ball tank forming part 201 or the non-covered area 350. are stacked up and down, so the screw member is often located at the top of the game ball, but the hole 271H is located on the downstream side of the rectifying plate 338 of the cover part 334, that is. , Since the game balls are arranged in a position where they are rectified in one level up and down, the screw member easily falls into the hole 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200.

Furthermore, at least some of the holes 271B to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided at positions corresponding to the non-covered region 350 in the first guide passage forming part 202, so that the screw member is not covered. Even if it enters the first guide passage forming part 202 from the area 350, it can fall out of the first guiding passage forming part 202 through the holes 271B to 271D.

Furthermore, at least some of the holes 271E to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided closer to the dispensing device 200 than the non-covered area 350 in the first guide passage forming part 202, so that the above-mentioned As shown, even if a game ball that has fallen from the non-covered area 350 to the first guide path forming part 202 does not reach the holes 271B to 271D, it moves as the game ball flows down and approaches the downward direction and falls from the holes 271E to 271H. Since the probability that this occurs increases, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), (B), and 24, the screw members N3 to N6 that have moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202 are removed from the first guiding passage forming part 202. Recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 as special retention parts that can be retained before reaching 202 are below the screw members N3 to N6 installed in the attachment holes H3 to H6 as the attached parts. The screw members N3 to N6, which were provided in the mounting holes H3 to H6 but did not stay in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243, are movable toward the cover parts 314, 324, and 334. , it is possible to prevent the screw members N3 to N6 that have come off from the mounting holes H3 to H6 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, the depth of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 is such that a portion of the screw members N3 to N6 protrudes when the screw members N3 to N6 are housed. The screw members N3 to N6 retained in 214, 242, and 243 can be easily taken out.

Further, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the grooves 326A to 326C, and the recess 336 prevent the falling screw member from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202. (or obstruct), but also allows the retention part to remain outside the first guide passage forming part 202, so that the screw member can be discovered by the staff of the game parlor etc. when performing inspection etc. This makes it easier to identify which screw member has come off, making it easier to take countermeasures against screw members getting mixed into the dispensing device 200.

In addition, in the ball stopper member 340 as a specific part, the rotating part 341 is located in the upright position, and the front wall part 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to guide the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 to the second guide. In the first state where the flow is allowed to flow down into the passage forming part 204, the rotating part 341 is located in the tilted position, the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the first guiding passage forming part 202 is in the first state. It is possible to change the game ball into a second state in which it is impossible (or difficult to flow down) into the second guide path forming part 204, and when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, it is better than the first state. By adopting a configuration in which the screw member is more likely to stay than in the case of , it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from getting mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

More specifically, as mentioned above, the ball stopper member 340 is placed in the second state when a game ball is pulled out from within the first guide path or the second guide path, that is, when a clerk at a game parlor or the like removes a game ball from a pachinko game machine. In contrast, the ball stopper member 340 is placed in the first state when the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the staff of the game hall cannot monitor it. Therefore, it is possible to suitably prevent the screw member from entering the first guide passage forming portion 202 in such a state.

Further, the ball tank forming portion 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by screw members N11 to N14 having flange portions F as locking portions, and the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching to the gaming machine frame 3 are attached to the first guiding passage forming part 202 and the ball so that they fall outside the first guiding passage forming part 202 even if they come off the gaming machine frame 3. It is attached at a position lower than the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the tank forming portion 201. Therefore, since the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming part 201 are easily loosened due to vibration and the weight of the game balls, the ball tank forming part 201 and Even if the screw members N11 to N14 that attach the first guide passage forming part 202 fall off, they will fall outside the first guiding passage forming part 202. can be prevented from being mixed in.

Further, among the plurality of screw members for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the gaming machine frame 3, a predetermined screw member near the peripheral portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, screw member N12 ) is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, the ground wire 226), so that the number of screw members (number of parts) can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the screw member from getting mixed into the dispensing device 200. In addition, instead of the ground wire, it may also be used as a screw member for attaching a predetermined member other than the ball tank forming part 201 and the first guide passage forming part 202.

Moreover, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming part 201 to the gaming machine frame 3 are attached to the metal plate 222 for reinforcing the gaming machine frame 3, so that the ball tank forming part 201 can be firmly attached, and since vibration is less likely to occur, loosening of the screw member can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, the screw members N3 to N6 installed above the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the gaming machine frame 3 are screw members having a small diameter head NH that does not have a flange portion F. Even if the screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it is easy to fall through the holes 271A to 271H, so that it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the dispensing device 200.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 19(B) and 27, in the area below the first guiding path forming part 202 of the game board 2 which can be attached to and detached from the frame 3 for the game machine, a screw member that has fallen is placed backward. Alternatively, an inclined surface (for example, the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that can flow down toward the dispensing device 200 side is provided with a gap from the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the cover body 220 It is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen onto the upper wall portion 220H from bouncing and being mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202 again.

Further, although not particularly illustrated, the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are provided so as not to protrude rearward beyond the rear wall portion of the cover body 220, and if the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A fall onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, The screw members are guided so as to flow backward or toward the dispensing device 200, thereby preventing the screw members that have fallen onto the upper wall portion 220H from falling into the board cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A arranged below. It can be prevented.

In addition, the cover body 220 is provided to cover the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, the performance device having a movable body, and the performance control board 12, so that the power generated from these drive sources is A plurality of heat dissipation holes 220B that emit heat are formed in the upper part of the rear wall (see FIG. 6). Preferably, the size is such that NH cannot be inserted. In addition, since there is a high possibility that screw members will fall from the upper hole portions 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H in the upper wall portion 220H disposed directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202, the heat radiation hole 220B is , it is preferable to form them at least in positions that do not correspond to the holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H in the upper wall part 220H, or to form them in parts other than the upper wall part 220H (for example, the rear wall part, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the falling screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and having an adverse effect on the image display device 5, the effect device having a movable body, the effect control board 12, etc.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of the present invention will be described based on FIG. 29. In FIG. 29, (A) is a schematic rear view showing a cover part as a modified example, and (B) is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired to cross the cover part.

In the embodiment described above, the guiding passage forming part that forms the guiding passage for guiding the game balls of the ball tank forming part 201 to the payout device 200 has a first guide passage forming part that is provided so as to be inclined downwardly toward the left side. It has a guiding passage forming part 202 and a second guiding passage forming part 204 extending downward from the lower left end of the first guiding passage forming part 202. As shown in FIG. 16, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330, which is provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface, is provided with a ball stopper member 340 on the upper surface of the left end part so as to protrude upward. In the above, a configuration is illustrated in which the screw member N moving to the left on the cover part 334 can be received and retained, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover part of Modification 1 360, the left end portion 360R of the cover portion 360 may be formed in an R shape that curves toward the second guide passage forming portion 204 below.

By doing so, when the game ball P and the screw member N that have fallen onto the cover part 360 move toward the left end side, they do not stay on the cover part 360 and can be moved to the first guiding passage forming part 202. Since the screw member N falls directly out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the left end thereof, it is possible to prevent the screw member N from getting mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 29(B), in a case where a recess 361 in which the screw member N can be retained is formed on the upper surface of the cover part 360, a recess 361 is formed in the cover part 360 at a position near the recess 361. A cable CH may be provided so as to intersect with the downward direction of the game ball in the first guide path forming section 202.

By doing so, the screw member N and the game ball P, which have stayed in the recess 361 but may move due to the inclination, can be kept by restricting their movement with the cable C.

(Explanation regarding transformation and application)
For example, in the embodiment, the screw members N1 to 6, N11 to 16 for attaching the mounting member 223, the first passage forming body 203, etc. to the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, Screw members (not shown) to be attached to other parts of the game machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the frame that constitutes the game island, various devices placed inside the game island (for example, , replenishment device 150, etc.) to the frame structure, etc., but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be used when manufacturing a game machine or when playing a game. All screw members, such as screw members that remain in the pachinko game machine 1 for some reason such as forgetting to install them during on-site maintenance, etc., can be targeted, but at least those screw members that have been installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in advance can be targeted. It is preferable that the screw member be prevented from entering the dispensing device 200.

Further, in the embodiment, the spherical tank forming part 201, which is formed in a box shape with an open top surface by the bottom wall part 203A and the vertical wall part B, is used as an example of a storage part capable of storing game media. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the storage part can store game balls, the front-to-back dimension may be smaller than the front-to-back dimension of the first guide passage forming part 202, like the ball tank forming part 201. It does not have to be long, and may have approximately the same front-to-back dimensions as the first guide passage forming portion 202 or may be shorter. Furthermore, the top surface does not necessarily have to be open as long as it can receive game balls supplied from the replenishing device 150.

In addition, in the embodiment described above, an example is given in which the payout device 200 that can pay out game balls using a rotatable sprocket is applied as a payout unit that can pay out game media, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be a payout device that can pay out game balls using a member other than the sprocket.

Further, in the embodiment described above, as a guide passage forming section that is open at the top and forms a guide passage for guiding game media in the storage section to the payout section, a recess whose top surface is open is formed by the bottom wall section 203A and the vertical wall section 203B. Although the first guide passage forming portion 202 formed in the shape of a groove is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be a passage forming part, and its shape, size, etc. can be changed in various ways. In addition, the width dimension (front-back dimension) may be substantially the same as or larger than the ball tank forming part 201, and the game balls may be guided so as to flow down in a plurality of rows.

In addition, in the embodiment, the ball tank forming part 201 as a storage part capable of storing game balls, and the first guiding passage whose upper surface is open and which guides the game balls of the ball tank forming part 201 to the payout device 200 are provided. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the first guiding passage forming part 202 is integrally molded, the present invention is not limited to this, and the spherical tank forming part 201 and the first guiding passage forming part 202 are separately molded. It may be integrally formed by assembling the members using screw members or the like. In this case, the threaded member for assembling the spherical tank forming part 201 and the first guide passage forming part 202 is also covered by the threaded member of the present invention.

Further, in the embodiment, a configuration in which a screw member can enter from the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming part 202 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guiding passage forming part 202 The screw member may be allowed to enter through holes, notches, etc. formed on the side of the vertical wall. In addition, if a screw member may be mixed in the second guide passage forming part 204, a predetermined restriction part for restricting the screw member from falling into the second guiding passage forming part 204, or A specific restriction section or the like may be provided to restrict the movement of the fallen screw member to the dispensing device 200.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are applied as the cover parts provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202. Although the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, the entire upper surface of the first guide passage forming section 202 may be covered by the cover section.

Further, in the embodiment, the cover part that covers a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202 may be made of a separate member from the first guiding passage forming part 202, or It may be formed integrally with the first guide passage forming portion 202 in advance. That is, the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance into a square tube shape.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the screw member is retained on the cover portion as a predetermined restriction portion for restricting the screw member that has fallen onto the cover portions 314, 324, and 334 from falling to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, but the present invention is not limited to this. A fall regulating part (drop inhibiting part) that can restrict (or inhibit) falling from above the cover part, and a movement regulating part (movement inhibiting part) that can restrict (or inhibit) the movement of screw members on the cover part. Alternatively, it may be a fall guide part such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall from above the cover part to the outside of the first guide passage forming part 202. Note that the means capable of regulating or inhibiting falling or movement may include not only a convex portion or a concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adhering a screw member, or the like.

In other words, the predetermined restriction section for restricting the screw member that has fallen onto the cover parts 314, 324, 334 from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202 is the predetermined restriction part for restricting the fall of the screw member onto the first guiding passage forming part 202. It does not just have to be something that makes it impossible for people to fall, it just needs to be something that makes it difficult to fall.

Further, in the embodiment, a plurality of specific restricting parts are provided in the first guiding passage forming part 202 and for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guiding passage forming part 202 to the dispensing device 200. Although the embodiment in which the holes 271A to 271H are applied is shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. or inhibition) may be a movement regulating section (movement inhibiting section). Note that means that can restrict or inhibit movement toward the dispensing device 200 side include not only convex portions and concave portions, but also magnets that can attract metal screw members, adhesive portions that can adhere screw members, etc. It is preferable to provide these at a position that does not affect the flow of the game ball (for example, a part where the game ball does not come into contact, such as a corner between the bottom wall part 203A and the standing wall part 203B).

In other words, the specific restriction section provided in the first guide passage forming part 202 and for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming part 202 to the dispensing device 200 is the As long as it can restrict the movement to the side, it does not necessarily make it impossible for the screw member mixed in the first guide passage forming part 202 to move to the dispensing device 200 side, but it can make the movement difficult. It is fine as long as it is something.

Furthermore, when the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide path forming section 202 to the dispensing device 200 is restricted (regulated, inhibited) by the specific restriction section provided in the first guiding path forming section 202, the movement is restricted. The downward movement of the game balls is also restricted by the screw member that is restricted and remains in the first guide passage, and there is a high possibility that the balls will become clogged. If balls become clogged, a replenishment error notification is executed as described above, and a staff member at the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 and removes the ball tank forming part 201 on the back side and the first guide path forming part. There is a high possibility that the status of the game balls in the section 202 will be visually inspected. At this time, since the screw member does not move to the dispensing device 200 and remains in the first guide passage forming part 202, it becomes easier for the store staff etc. to identify that the cause of the ball clogging was the screw member. It becomes possible to take appropriate measures.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the plurality of holes 271A to 271H all have a size that allows the screw member to fall, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are As long as at least two of the holes 271H to 271H are formed so that the screw member can be dropped, the other holes do not need to be able to drop the screw member. Further, the shape and size of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are arbitrary, and can be changed in various ways without being limited to the above-mentioned form.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 are used as the first board installed at a position lower than the first guide path forming part 202, but the present invention is limited to this. However, other boards such as relay boards may also be used.

Further, in the embodiment, the terminal board 210 is used as the second board mounted above the first guide passage forming part 202, but the present invention is not limited to this. , Other substrates such as a relay board may also be used as the second board.

Further, in the embodiment, the main board 11 as the first board and the performance control board 12 are attached to the game board 2 by the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are housed by screw members N20 and N21. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the various boards described above as the first board may be directly attached to the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 without using a board case.

In addition, in the embodiment, the main board 11 as the first board and the production control board 12 have board cases 11A and 12A in which each board is housed with screw members N20 and N21, that is, screw members are used. The terminal board 210, which is attached to the game board 2 as a second board, is attached to the game board 2 by the attachment method, using a locking means consisting of a plurality of regulating parts 235 and a locking part 236 as a mounting means different from the screw member, that is, Although the embodiment has been illustrated in which it is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by a different attachment method than the attachment method using screw members, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. It may include a mounting means, an adhesive means using an adhesive, and the like.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the screw member is provided around the first guide passage forming part 202 to prevent the screw member that has moved toward the first guiding passage forming part 202 from falling into the first guiding passage forming part 202. Although a configuration in which the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are applied as special restriction portions for the purpose of A fall regulating part (fall inhibiting part) that can regulate (or inhibit) the fall of the screw member, a movement regulating part (movement inhibiting part) that can regulate (or inhibit) the movement of the screw member to the first guide path forming part 202, , a fall guiding portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall out of the first guiding path forming portion 202 may be used. Note that means that can restrict or inhibit falling or movement toward the first guide path forming portion 202 include not only convex portions and concave portions, but also magnets capable of attracting metal screw members, and means capable of adhering screw members. It may also be an adhesive part or the like.

In other words, the special restriction part for restricting the screw member that has come off from falling into the first guide passage forming part 202 is not only one that makes it impossible for the screw member to fall into the first guiding passage forming part 202; Any material that can be made difficult to fall is sufficient. For example, a convex portion serving as a fall regulating portion (fall inhibiting portion), a recessed portion or a hole serving as a movement regulating portion (movement inhibiting portion), etc. may be provided at a predetermined position such as the upper wall portion 225A.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the periphery of the first guide passage forming part 202 in which the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, etc. as special restriction parts are provided is located near the front vertical wall part 203B. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and at least as long as it is between the attached part (attachment hole) to which the screw member is attached and the guide passage forming part, it is not necessarily provided at a position near the vertical wall part 203B. For example, the screw member may be provided between the attached portion of the screw member and the guide passage forming portion at a position closer to the attached portion than the guiding passage forming portion.

Further, in the embodiment, a first specifying portion is provided on the dispensing device 200 side in the oblique direction of the cover portion 334 as a specific portion capable of retaining the screw member N6 that has fallen onto the cover portion 334. Although the embodiment in which the ball stopping member 340 that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball of the guide passage forming part 202 is allowed to flow down and a second state in which it is difficult or impossible to flow down is applied, the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and any member provided on the dispensing device 200 side (lower inclination side) of the cover part 334 in the inclined direction can restrict the movement of the screw member even if it does not have a ball-stopping function. It may also be a convex portion, a standing wall portion, a wiring holder, etc. that can (or obstruct).

Further, in the embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as a specific part is provided on the dispensing device 200 side in the oblique direction of the cover part 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the specific part may be provided at the end of the cover parts 314, 324 on the dispensing apparatus 200 side, as long as it is provided at the end of one cover part on the dispensing apparatus 200 side.

Further, in the embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific part is configured as a separate member from the cover part 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. A specific part (ball stopper part) may be integrally formed in a part of the member constituting the cover part 334.

Further, in the embodiment, as an example of the locking part, a flange part F (washer) having a larger diameter than the head part NH of the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 and integrally formed with the head part NH is used. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the flange portion F may be replaced with a washer etc. that is formed separately from the screw member and can be attached to the screw member, or a head It also includes the rotation stopper of the head NH formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the NH and the flange portion F (washer), adhesive, and the like. Further, the screw member is not limited to one that can be attached with a tool such as a screwdriver, but may also be a thumbscrew, and includes members such as screws and bolts that separate from the attached part when loosened.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the ball tank forming part 201 as a storage part is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by screw members N11 to N14 having flange parts F as loosening prevention parts, and the ball tank forming part 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the part 201 and the first guiding passage forming part 202 to the gaming machine frame 3 are arranged so that they fall outside the first guiding passage forming part 202 even if they come off the gaming machine frame 3. , the first guide passage forming part 202 and the spherical tank forming part 201 are attached at a position lower than the upper end edge of the vertical wall part 203B, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the position is above the upper edge of the vertical wall 203B of the guiding passage forming part 202 or the spherical tank forming part 201, for example, it may be shifted in the horizontal direction from the position directly above the first guiding passage forming part 202 or the spherical tank forming part 201. If the screw member is attached to a position other than directly above the screw member, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling directly into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Further, the fallen screw member is guided to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 by a predetermined guide portion (for example, a groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A). Good too.

In addition, the predetermined restriction part, specific restriction part, special restriction part, and identification part in the embodiment are not limited to the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko game machine 1, but also the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko game machine 1, Although the embodiment has been illustrated in which the movement of screw members other than the machine 1 to the payout device 200 is restricted or restricted (inhibited), the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Restrict or restrict the movement of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16, and further the screw members N3 to N6 attached above the first guide passage forming part 202 and the ball tank forming part 201 to the dispensing device 200. It is preferable that it be formed in a size and shape that allows (inhibition).

(Characteristic part 053SG)
Next, a mode for implementing a gaming machine in the feature section 053SG according to the present invention will be described based on FIGS. 30-1 to 30-24.

The gaming machine in the feature section 053SG is a pachinko gaming machine installed in a gaming hall, a slot machine, etc., and in particular, as shown in FIG. It is equipped with a gaming control board. The pachinko game machine 1 of the above embodiment can be applied as the gaming machine described below, the main board 11 of the above embodiment can be used as the game control board, and the performance control board 12 can be used as the performance control board. It is.

As shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of input components such as various switches and sensors that detect input conditions according to the progress of the game. Input components include, for example, a detection switch that detects an operation by a player, a detection switch that detects the passage of game media such as game balls and medals, a sensor that specifies the position of a movable object used in a game such as a reel, and a sensor that identifies the position of a movable object used in a game such as a reel. These include detection switches used for various settings such as the degree of advantage, and detection switches for detecting door openings, abnormalities, etc.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-1, the game control board is equipped with an input circuit that detects input signals from these input components, and the detection status of input signals from the input components by the input circuit is specified. The input data is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and used to control the game by the game control microcomputer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of output parts such as a display, an LED, a motor, a solenoid, etc., which perform output control according to the progress of the game. Output parts include, for example, a display that displays according to lottery results, a display that displays the progress of the game and the status of the gaming machine, a display that instructs the player on how to operate, and a value owned by the player. LEDs that indicate the game status, LEDs that notify the occurrence of an abnormality, motors and solenoids that operate movable parts used in games such as reels and variable winning devices.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 30-1, the game control board is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the corresponding output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. , the game control microcomputer controls the output parts according to the progress of the game by transmitting output data to the output circuit.

In addition, the game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are connected via a data bus, and input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer, and from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The transmission of the output data of is carried out via a shared data bus.

Also, rather than all input circuits being connected via a shared data bus, some input circuits are directly connected to the gaming control microcomputer without going through a data bus, and are connected via a shared data bus. Input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer without going through the input circuit.

In addition, all output circuits are configured to be connected via a shared data bus, but some output circuits are directly connected to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus, and are connected to the shared data bus. A configuration may also be used in which output data is transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without going through the data bus.

In addition, the data bus is connected to an external output terminal, and the output data from the gaming control microcomputer is output to external equipment as an external output signal. It is possible to inspect the performance, etc. of a gaming machine using the output data outputted as .

Next, the game control board included in the game machine of the present invention will be explained using Examples 1 to 3 below.

The structure of the game control board in Example 1 will be explained. The game control board has an electronic component mounted on one surface, no electronic component mounted on the other surface, and a terminal provided on the electronic component is soldered.In the following, the electronic component is mounted. The surface is called the mounting surface, and the surface on which electronic components are not mounted and the terminals of the electronic components are soldered is called the soldering surface.

FIG. 30-2 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-3 is a diagram showing the solder surface of the game control board in this example. As shown in FIGS. 30-2 and 30-3, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and is an insulating printed board. Consisted of. In addition, the game control board is formed with a plurality of through holes that penetrate through the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board are made of a conductor so as to connect the through holes as appropriate. A plurality of wiring patterns are formed. Further, in the area where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board, an insulating region made of an insulator and a ground region made of a conductor and forming a ground are formed. The ground area is a solid ground formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulation area are formed on the mounting surface and solder surface of the game control board.

As shown in Figure 30-2, on the mounting surface, the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction is greater than the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction. , the number of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction is greater than the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are concentrated on the mounting surface, the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are concentrated on the soldering surface, and when the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction intersect, Designs such as detours around wiring patterns can be minimized.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-3, the wiring pattern placed on the solder side has many wires that extend in the same horizontal direction as the long side, so the distance between the wiring patterns is longer than that of the wiring pattern placed on the mounting surface. However, as mentioned above, electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, not on the solder surface, and the relatively long wiring pattern placed on the solder surface is obstructed by the electronic components. This is avoided.

Also, when branching a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, one of the wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the solder surface, and the other is formed on the mounting surface through a through hole. The wiring pattern is branched without detouring one wiring pattern or crossing one wiring pattern and the other wiring pattern at the branch destination on the same plane.

FIG. 30-4 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the input circuit and output circuit mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-4, electronic components such as the aforementioned game control microcomputer, input circuit, output circuit, etc. are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include electronic components having one or more terminal rows each consisting of a plurality of terminals arranged in one direction. Most of the electronic components including these terminal rows are arranged along the long sides of the game control board, that is, so as to be lined up in the lateral direction. As mentioned above, on the mounting surface, a large proportion of the wiring patterns extend in the vertical direction, and electronic components with terminal rows are often arranged along the long sides of the game control board, that is, lined up in the horizontal direction. By doing so, the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction can be directly connected to the rows of terminals arranged in the horizontal direction without changing the direction of the wiring pattern.

In addition, the input circuit and the output circuit of the electronic components having terminal rows are formed in a rectangular shape, and have a concave cutout on one of the short sides, and a surface of the input circuit and the output circuit, as shown in Figure 30-4. The model number is printed, and the orientation of the part can be identified by the direction of the notch and the direction in which the model number is printed. As shown in Figure 30-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in Figure 30-4 and the direction in which the model number is printed is from left to right, while the output circuit is , in Figure 30-4, the notches are arranged to the right, and the model number is printed in the direction from right to left. It is said that it is possible to specify whether there is an output circuit or an output circuit.

FIG. 30-5 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-6 is a diagram showing the structure of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a branched wiring pattern.

As mentioned above, the game control board is formed with a data bus that is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. . The data bus formed on the game control board of this example is composed of eight horizontally extending wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, and as shown in Figure 30-5, the data bus formed on the game control board It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend horizontally toward the right side from a through hole to which the terminals of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in Figure 30-6, electronic components such as data buses, input circuits, and output circuits are connected to wiring patterns that are formed so as to branch to the mounting surface side through through holes and extend vertically in the vertical direction. Connected by

In this way, when connecting the game control microcomputer and electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits that are separated laterally via a data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer are soldered horizontally. It is connected to the data bus on the surface, and branches into a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side that extends vertically toward the electronic component through a through hole at the position where the electronic component is mounted, and is connected to the electronic component. Therefore, there is no need to take a detour through a wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer and electronic components separated laterally can be efficiently connected. In addition, since the wiring patterns that make up the data bus are formed on the solder surface where electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from electronic components. Since the connection is made by a wiring pattern that branches to the mounting surface side through the hole, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is short and is less susceptible to the influence of noise from electronic components during this period.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the horizontally extending wiring patterns constituting the data bus are not formed in a straight line, but are divided into a plurality of horizontally extending wiring patterns. The length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is determined by the antenna with maximum resonance depending on the bus clock (frequency used when transmitting data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. It is formed to be shorter than the length (λ (bus clock)/2). Therefore, the wiring pattern constituting the data bus has an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock, thereby preventing unintended radio waves from being emitted due to resonance. Furthermore, even if the length of the antenna corresponding to the bus clock is 1/2, strong resonance may occur due to reflection on the surface of the board. The lengths (L1 to L8) are formed to a length that is not 1/2 of the antenna length at which resonance is maximum depending on the bus clock, and strong resonance occurs due to reflection on the surface of the board. Emission of radio waves is also prevented.

In addition, although the bus clock varies depending on the installed game control microcomputer and oscillator, the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) depends on the bus clock that has the expected maximum frequency. It is formed to be shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximum, and further not to be half the antenna length at which resonance is maximum, depending on the bus clock at maximum frequency. Therefore, even if data is transmitted using a bus clock that is less than the expected maximum frequency, unintended radio waves are prevented from being generated.

As shown in Figure 30-5, the horizontal wiring patterns that are divided into a plurality of parts constituting the data bus are diagonally rightward or diagonally leftward, that is, the direction of the horizontal wiring patterns that are divided into a plurality of parts is They are connected across wiring patterns that extend in different directions. Further, the horizontal wiring pattern divided into a plurality of parts and the diagonally rightward or diagonally leftward wiring pattern are bent at an obtuse angle and connected. This prevents unintended radio waves from being emitted from the bent portion of the wiring pattern.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-5, mounting is carried out through through holes (A to F shown in Figure 30-5) provided on the diagonal wiring pattern that connects the horizontal wiring patterns divided into multiple parts. It is designed to branch into side wiring patterns (wiring patterns connected to A to F shown in Figure 30-6), and is a diagonal wiring pattern that connects horizontal wiring patterns divided into multiple parts. The wiring pattern that makes up the data bus is now branched using

In addition, in the game control board in Example 1, in order to make the length of the horizontal wiring pattern shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized, the horizontal wiring pattern is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns. In this configuration, horizontal wiring patterns divided into multiple parts are connected to each other by diagonal wiring patterns formed on the same solder surface. In other words, the horizontal wiring pattern is formed alternately on the solder surface and the mounting surface so that the length of the horizontal wiring pattern is shorter than the antenna length that maximizes resonance. Also good. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch the horizontal wiring pattern at a point where it switches from the solder surface or the mounting surface to the other surface, and by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to bypass the wiring pattern after branching. , it becomes possible to branch the wiring patterns constituting the data bus without crossing them on the same plane.

FIG. 30-7 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-8 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ground area formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area.

As shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, a ground area is formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulation area are formed on the mounting surface and solder surface of the game control board. The ground area formed on the game control board is composed of a first ground area and a second ground area that are electrically separated via an insulating area. On both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground region is formed in the left region of the game control board, and the second ground region is formed in the right region of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-7, wiring patterns to which low voltage (Vcc (+5V) in this example) signals are transmitted are connected to the game control microcomputer, input circuit, output circuit, etc. Electronic components (low voltage components) are mounted in the left region where the first ground region is formed, and the ground terminals of the low voltage components are connected to the first ground region. On the other hand, electronic components (high-voltage components) to which wiring patterns for transmitting high-voltage (VLD (+24V) in this example) signals are connected, such as drive circuits for operating motors, solenoids, etc. The high voltage component is mounted in the right region where the second ground region is formed, and the ground terminal of the high voltage component is connected to the second ground region. This prevents unintended current from flowing back from the high voltage component to the low voltage component via the ground area. Furthermore, since the first ground region and the second ground region are formed on opposite sides of the game control board, they are prevented from interfering with each other even if a temporary potential difference occurs.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 30-9, since a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area, this capacitor causes a gap between the first ground area and the second ground area. Even if a potential difference temporarily occurs, current is prevented from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, an insulating region in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the first The ground area and the second ground area are electrically separated. Further, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface are formed to overlap with the first ground area and the second ground area on the solder surface, and the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface are formed so as to overlap with each other. Since the insulating area that separates the ground area and the insulating area that separates the first and second ground areas on the solder surface overlap, there is Even if a temporary potential difference occurs, interference with each other is prevented.

Figure 30-10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this example, and Figure 30-11 is a diagram showing the connector formed on the solder side of the game control board in this example. It is a diagram showing a peripheral wiring pattern, and FIG. 30-12 is a diagram showing a state in which the game control board in this embodiment is housed in a board case.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN7 for connecting wiring from outside the game control board are mounted on the game control board near the lower side of the mounting surface. The wiring from the game control board includes a signal that triggers a lottery, a signal that allows setting values that define advantages for players such as lottery probability to change to a state that can be changed, and a signal that allows changing the setting value. Wiring that inputs or outputs signals related to the advantageousness of the game, such as signals that display information advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring that inputs detection signals for error cancellation operations, and backup power supplies. Includes wiring as a supply line.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. As shown at -11, it is connected to a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, that is, the surface opposite to the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 30-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting parts of connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connectors such as connector numbers is printed around them. ing. Note that the information printed around the mounting portions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, but may also include information regarding the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, the connection destination, etc.

As shown in Figure 30-11, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder side passes through the through hole at the end opposite to the side connected to the terminal, and the wiring on the mounting surface. connected to the pattern. In particular, the through holes a to h shown in Figures 30-10 and 30-11 are through holes to which terminals of electronic components are connected, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in connectors CN1 to CN7. It is provided at the location where it is first connected to the electronic component. Therefore, the solder surface can be connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface by using the through hole for connecting to the electronic component.

As shown in FIGS. 30-12(A) and (B), the game control board is attached to the gaming machine while being housed in the board case. The board case can be sealed with one-way screws, seals, welding, etc., and once sealed, it is difficult to open it without leaving traces. Therefore, by attaching the game control board to the gaming machine while it is housed in the board case, the game control board is structured to be prevented from being tampered with.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-12(A) and (B), the board case is provided with a covering portion that covers the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 when the game control board is housed. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 30-10, the wiring pattern is not formed in the area covered by the covering part of the board case on the mounting surface of the game control board, but the wiring pattern is formed avoiding the area. There is. The covering portion is provided with insertion holes having substantially the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, through which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside and can be connected to external wiring.

Even when the game control board is stored in the board case in this way, there will be some gaps around the connectors CN1 to CN7 because the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to external wiring, but the connectors CN1 to CN7 The terminals provided on the terminals are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the soldering surface, that is, the surface on which connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. It is designed to be connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite side, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of connectors CN1 to CN7 can be short-circuited from around the part where connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case. This prevents fraudulent activities such as disconnection.

Furthermore, the area around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface is covered by the covering part of the board case, and the area covered by the covering part has wiring connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7. None of the wiring patterns including patterns are formed, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface in areas other than the covering part, Illegal acts such as short-circuiting or disconnecting the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1-CN7 from around the portion where the connectors CN1-CN7 are exposed from the board case are reliably prevented.

FIG. 30-13 is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-13, Vcc (+5V) is generated on the power supply board and is connected to the power input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. In addition, Vcc (+5V) is branched from the line supplied to the gaming control microcomputer on the power supply board, and is connected to the charging capacitor via the backflow prevention diode. A line branched between is connected to a backup power supply input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While power is being supplied, Vcc (+5V) is supplied as a power source for driving the game control microcomputer, and the charging capacitor is charged. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+5V) is stopped, and the backup power supply VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer. The game control microcomputer is supplied with a backup power supply VBB so that data stored in the RAM included in the game control microcomputer is retained. In this embodiment, the backup power source is supplied from a power supply board outside the game control board, but it may be supplied from a circuit provided within the game control board.

FIG. 30-14 is a diagram showing a power supply wiring pattern formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-15 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between the printed wiring pattern and the power supply wiring pattern formed on the solder surface.

As shown in FIG. 30-14, on the solder side of the game control board, there are wiring patterns Vcc1 to Vcc3 that supply normal power, and wiring patterns VBB that supply backup power, as wiring patterns that constitute the power supply line. , is formed. As shown in FIGS. 30-14 and 30-15, the wiring patterns Vcc1 to Vcc3 are composed of a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface and a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, and are mounted on the game control board. Connected to electronic components. On the other hand, the wiring pattern VBB is composed only of the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, as shown in FIG. 30-14. That is, the wiring pattern VBB is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer through only the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface without being connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied from the power supply board is formed only on the solder surface. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to bypass the electronic components mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, so it is free from external noise. This prevents data stored in the RAM from being damaged by noise.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-15, on the mounting surface, a solid ground is formed in the portion where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. Therefore, noise is blocked by the solid ground formed on the mounting surface, making the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface side less susceptible to noise. Also, as shown in Figure 30-15, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying backup power is closer to the mounting surface than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power. It is formed at a position where the number of intersections with the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, especially the wiring pattern used for signal transmission, is reduced in the corresponding area. Therefore, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied from the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side and used for signal transmission is suppressed as much as possible.

Note that, in this embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying backup power is closer to the corresponding area on the mounting surface side than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power. The configuration is such that it is formed in a position where there are fewer intersections with the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting side, but among the wiring patterns formed on the solder side, the signal that triggers the lottery Wiring patterns that transmit signals that are related to the player's interests, such as signals that control output parts, are better suited to the mounting side than wiring patterns that transmit signals that are not directly related to the player's history, such as signals that control output parts. By configuring the wiring pattern to be formed in a position where there are fewer intersections with the wiring pattern used for transmitting signals formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area, it can be used for transmitting signals formed on the mounting surface side. The influence of noise on the wiring pattern through which signals related to the player's profits are transmitted is suppressed as much as possible.

In addition, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, wiring patterns that transmit reset signals to the game control microcomputer and wiring patterns that provide an operating clock to the game control microcomputer are relatively important. A location where the wiring pattern for signal transmission intersects with the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side, rather than the wiring pattern for transmitting other signals. By configuring the wiring pattern to be formed in a position where there is less noise, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern used to transmit signals of relatively high importance from the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side used for signal transmission is minimized. It can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-16 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which a game control board is attached to a slot machine. Slot machines are equipped with game components related to games, such as a liquid crystal display, a production control board that controls production, a reel unit consisting of a plurality of reels, and a hopper unit that pays out medals. When attaching the game control board to the slot machine, the mounting side of the game control board, that is, the side opposite to the solder side on which the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied is formed, should be placed on the game component side. Attached to be placed. With such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from the game components on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-17 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which a game control board is attached to a pachinko game machine. When a pachinko game machine is installed in a game parlor, it is often installed so that its back faces face each other with other game devices such as other pachinko game machines. When the game control board is attached to a pachinko game machine, the mounting side of the game control board, that is, the side opposite to the solder side on which the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied is formed, is used for other games. It is attached so that it is placed on the device side. With this configuration, the influence of noise emitted from other gaming machines on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied can be suppressed.

(effect 1)
In the game control board of this embodiment, wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface has a proportion of the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (vertical direction). The proportion of wiring patterns formed on the solder surface is larger than the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction), which is different from the first direction. It is characterized by a larger proportion of the wiring patterns extending in the direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface, so that the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface. When a wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction) intersects with a wiring pattern extending in the second direction (horizontal direction), it is possible to minimize the need for detours around the wiring pattern.

The game control board of this embodiment is a square consisting of a pair of sides (left side and right side) extending in a first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of sides (upper side and lower side) extending in a second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by its shape. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed without waste along the shape of the game control board.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components including a terminal row consisting of a plurality of terminals are arranged so that the terminal rows are lined up in the second direction (horizontal direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (left-right direction) can be directly connected to the electronic component.

The game control board of this embodiment has a pair of short sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of long sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). It has a rectangular shape, and is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, a wiring pattern in the second direction (horizontal direction), which can be long in distance, can be formed on the solder surface without being obstructed by electronic components.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern includes a wiring pattern that branches from a first wiring pattern to a second wiring pattern, and one of the two wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the mounting surface, The other wiring pattern is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to detour one wiring pattern at the branch destination or to cross one wiring pattern at the branch destination and the other wiring pattern on the same plane, and the wiring pattern can be suitably arranged. can be formed.

(effect 2)
The game control board of this embodiment connects the first terminal (terminal of the game control microcomputer) and the second terminal (terminal of the input circuit, output circuit) separated in a specific direction (left and right direction), and connects a specific signal (terminal of the input circuit, output circuit). A specific wiring pattern (data bus) used for transmitting (input data, output data) is formed, and the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is divided into multiple wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left/right direction). Each straight line wiring pattern that is formed by dividing and extending in a specific direction (left and right) has a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length according to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than the According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed by dividing into a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction), and a straight line pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction). Each of the wiring patterns is formed shorter than the specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length according to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), so that the specific wiring pattern (data bus ) can be prevented from having an antenna length that corresponds to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data), and can prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (left-right direction). . According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In addition, the game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (left-right direction). However, a configuration may also be adopted in which wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are alternately formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. Even in such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) is a wiring pattern that is different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern and another wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by branching into According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be suitably branched using the space between one wiring pattern and another wiring pattern extending in a specific direction.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left and right direction) has an antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as a bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2). According to such a configuration, since the length of the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left and right direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of a specific signal (input data, output data), This prevents unintended radio waves from being emitted even if a signal is transmitted.

In the gaming control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction has a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length according to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by a length that is not 1/2 (λ/4). According to such a configuration, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) becomes 1/2 of the specific length (λ/2), and strong resonance occurs due to reflection from the surface of the board. Since there is no radio wave, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

(Effect 3)
The game control board of this embodiment includes a first electronic component (low voltage component) connected to a wiring pattern to which a signal of a first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is transmitted, and a second voltage (VDL (+24V)). A second electronic component (high voltage component) is connected to a wiring pattern through which a signal is transmitted, a first electronic component (low voltage component) is connected to the first ground area, and a second electronic component ( A high voltage component) is characterized in that it is connected to a second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulating part. According to such a configuration, the first electronic component (low-voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is transmitted is connected to the first ground area, and the second voltage The second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern for transmitting the (VDL (+24V)) signal is connected is connected to the second ground area separated from the first ground area by the insulation part (insulation area). This prevents unintended current from flowing backwards through the ground.

In addition, in the game control board of this embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is transmitted is connected is connected to the first ground area, A second electronic component (high voltage component) to which a wiring pattern to which a second voltage (VDL (+24V)) signal is transmitted is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating section. Regarding the configuration, in a configuration in which there is a large difference in current flowing through wiring patterns connected between the first electronic component and the second electronic component, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component is connected to the first ground area. It may be configured to be connected to a second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulating part, and with such a configuration, the wiring connected between the first electronic component and the second electronic component. Even if the difference in current flowing through the patterns is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground area, so unintended current flows backward through the ground. This can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. According to such a configuration, even if a potential difference temporarily occurs between the first ground region and the second ground region due to the capacitor, it is possible to prevent current from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region. .

The game control board of this embodiment has a first ground area formed on one side (left side), a second ground area formed on the other side (right side) opposite to the one side, and a first electronic component (low voltage component). ) is mounted in the first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is mounted in the second ground area. According to such a configuration, since the first ground area and the second ground area are respectively formed on opposing sides of the game control board, they can be prevented from interfering with each other even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

The game control board of this example has a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) in which no wiring pattern is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface. It is characterized by According to such a configuration, the insulation between the first ground region and the second ground region can be improved.

Note that the game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even in a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on at least one of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground area and The insulation between the second ground regions can be improved.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface and the first ground area and the second ground area on the solder surface are formed in corresponding areas, respectively, and the mounting surface The non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) on the solder surface and the non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) on the solder surface are also formed in corresponding areas. According to such a configuration, even if a potential difference temporarily occurs from one surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface to the other surface, interference with each other can be prevented.

(Effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is installed in a game machine while being housed in a board case, and connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the mounting surface. The terminals of (connectors CN1 to CN7) are characterized in that they are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. According to this configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected not to the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted, but to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface on the opposite side. It is possible to prevent unauthorized acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from around the part where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring connected to the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is the wiring related to the gaming advantage (signal for transitioning to a state where the setting value can be changed, changing the setting value It is characterized by including wiring for inputting or outputting signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display. According to such a configuration, fraudulent acts related to the advantage of the game can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) regarding the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portion of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. According to this configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern is formed around the mounting part of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. Therefore, by displaying information (connector number) regarding the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) in this area, it is possible to effectively utilize the area on the mounting surface where the wiring pattern is not formed.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the board case includes a covering part that covers the area around the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is as follows. It is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface in the area covered by the covering part. According to this configuration, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is not formed on the mounting surface even in the peripheral area of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), so the connector It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (CN1 to CN7) from around the exposed portions of the connectors (CN1 to CN7).

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface at the point where it is first connected to the electronic component. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through hole for connecting to the electronic component.

(Effect 5)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components including a microcomputer for game control having a storage means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. The microcomputer for game control can hold the memory contents of the storage means (RAM) using a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) supplied by the wiring pattern, and the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) is used by the microcomputer for game control. The wiring pattern (VBB) to be supplied to the semiconductor device is characterized in that it is formed only on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern for supplying a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface where no electronic components are mounted, so it is possible to bypass the electronic components. Since it is not necessary to form a wiring pattern and the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, it is less susceptible to external noise, and it is possible to prevent data stored in the storage means (RAM) from being damaged by noise.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is placed on the side of game components related to the game (such as a liquid crystal display and a performance control board that controls the performance). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from the game components on the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is placed on the other gaming machine (other gaming machine) side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from other gaming devices on the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the gaming control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment has a solid area on the mounting surface side corresponding to the area where the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is provided on the solder surface. It is characterized by the formation of a ground. According to such a configuration, noise from the mounting surface side can be blocked by the solid ground formed on the mounting surface.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is set to A feature is that there are few intersections with the wiring pattern for transmitting signals in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side. According to such a configuration, the influence of noise from the wiring pattern for transmitting signals on the mounting surface side can be prevented as much as possible.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the spirit of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say, it can be done.

For example, in this embodiment, an example is explained in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board that controls games, but other boards installed in a gaming machine, such as a board that controls performances. The configuration according to the present invention may be applied to a board that controls the provision of game media and gaming value, and further, a board that relays between boards.

The structure of the game control board in Example 2 will be explained. Similar to the first embodiment, the game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, no electronic components are mounted on the other surface, and terminals included in the electronic components are soldered. The configuration of the game control board in Example 2 is basically the same as the configuration of the game control board in Example 1, and here, mainly the different configurations from the game control board in Example 1 will be explained. .

FIG. 30-18 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and FIG. 30-19 is a diagram showing the solder surface of the game control board in this example.

As shown in FIGS. 30-18 and 30-19, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and is an insulating printed board. Consisted of. In addition, a plurality of through holes are formed in the game control board, and a plurality of wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and solder surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. Furthermore, an insulating region and a ground region are formed in the mounting surface and solder surface of the game control board in the region where the wiring pattern is not formed.

Similarly to the game control board of Example 1, the game control board in Example 2 is also equipped with an input circuit and an output circuit, and these input circuits and output circuits are formed in a rectangular shape, and A concave notch is provided on one of the sides, and a model number is printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the part can be identified by the direction of the notch and the direction in which the model number is printed. The input circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the left side in the figure and the printing direction of the model number is from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the right side in the figure and the model number is printed in the direction from left to right. They are arranged so that the printing direction is from right to left, and it is possible to identify whether these electronic components are input circuits or output circuits by the position of the notch and the direction in which the model number is printed. There is.

FIG. 30-20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example, and FIG. 30-21 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this example. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a branched wiring pattern.

A data bus is formed on the game control board, which is used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this example is composed of eight horizontally extending wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, and as shown in Figure 30-20, the data bus formed on the game control board It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend horizontally toward the right side from a through hole to which the terminals of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in Figure 30-21, the data bus, input circuit, and output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern that branches to the mounting surface side through a through hole and extends vertically in the vertical direction. .

In this way, when connecting a game control microcomputer and input circuits and output circuits that are separated laterally via a data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer are connected to a data bus on the solder side that extends laterally. At the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted, it branches into a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side that extends vertically toward the input circuit or output circuit through a through hole, and is connected to the input circuit or output circuit. becomes. Therefore, there is no need to take a detour through a wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to input circuits and output circuits that are separated laterally. In addition, since the wiring pattern that makes up the data bus is formed on the solder surface where electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from electronic components, and furthermore, the data bus is connected to the input circuit and output circuit. are connected by a wiring pattern that branches to the mounting surface side through a through hole, so that the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is short and is less susceptible to the influence of noise from electronic components during this time.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-22, the data bus is connected to a noise removal circuit at a position closer to the gaming control microcomputer than any of the input circuits and output circuits connected to the data bus. This makes it difficult for noise on the data bus to affect the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-20, the game control board has connectors CN10 to CN17 mounted near the top side in the figure for connecting wiring from outside the game control board, and also connects a data bus. The constituting wiring pattern is formed in a region of the game control board near the bottom side in the figure, that is, a region near the other side opposite to one side where the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. For this reason, a wide area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits is secured between the data bus and the connectors CN10 to CN17 where signals are input/output to and from external electronic components of the game control board. It has become.

As shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, the game control board receives an input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used to control the game (which does not trigger the lottery). A first input circuit that detects an input from a second input component that is more important than the first input component (a sensor or switch detection signal that triggers a lottery, an advantageous Based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, the movable parts such as solenoids and motors operate according to the progress of the game. A first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that performs the process, and a second output that displays various displays, LEDs, etc. according to the progress of the game based on the output data from the game control microcomputer. A second output circuit that outputs output signals to the components is mounted on the game control board based on output data from the game control microcomputer, and is used to determine the payout rate etc. of the game machine when playing games over a certain period of time. A third output circuit is implemented to output an output signal to a performance indicator that displays performance.

Among these input circuits and output circuits, the first output circuit, first output circuit, second output circuit, and third output circuit are connected to a data bus, and input data transmission and output data transmission are performed via the data bus. will be carried out.

As shown in Figure 30-20, the wiring pattern constituting the data bus connected to the terminals of the game control microcomputer on the solder side branches to the mounting side through through holes at multiple locations, and vertically branches on the mounting side. It is connected to the wiring pattern formed in the direction. As shown in FIGS. 30-21, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. Further, a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through a through hole at a position N in the figure is connected to a terminal of a third output circuit. Further, wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface side through through holes at positions O and P in the figure are connected to terminals of the first output circuit. In addition, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at position Q in the figure is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit and branches on the mounting surface, and some wiring patterns are left as they are to the outside. The remaining wiring pattern is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side through a through hole at position R in the figure, and then connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting side through a through hole again at position S in the figure. and connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, among the input and output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the input circuit has a longer wiring pattern to the gaming control microcomputer than the output circuit. Connected to the data bus so that it is short. Therefore, the input data used to control the game is less likely to be affected by noise or the like.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, output signals are sent to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game among the plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus. The first output circuit that outputs the output signal has a shorter wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game. connected to the data bus. This prevents the output data from being affected by noise or the like, which would affect the operation of the movable part in accordance with the progress of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 30-20 and 30-21, among the plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance display is other than the performance display. The length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the display device (second output component) that displays the progress of the game. connected to the bus. For this reason, it is difficult to tamper with the contents of the performance display due to the placement of unauthorized parts, etc.

In addition, as shown in Figure 30-21, the wiring pattern on the mounting side, which is connected through the through hole at the position Q in the figure, from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder side, changes depending on the progress of the game. It is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs, and the wiring pattern branches on the mounting surface and outputs the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. Connected to the external output terminal for output to. In this way, the data bus formed on the solder surface is connected to the second output circuit in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through hole. The wiring pattern is divided into the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the external output terminal for outputting output signals according to the progress of the game to external equipment. Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each wiring pattern connected to the wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

In addition, the wiring pattern on the mounting side connected through the through hole from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder side is a second output component that outputs an output signal to a second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game. In addition to being connected to the terminals of the 2-output circuit, it also has a configuration in which it branches on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is connected to an output circuit for outputting output signals to external equipment in accordance with the progress of the game. Even with this configuration, it is possible to use the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through hole from the data bus formed on the solder surface to output output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface. By branching the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the output circuit for outputting output signals according to the progress of the game to external equipment, it is possible to connect to multiple output circuits. Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The second input circuit among the input circuits is not connected to the data bus, and input data is directly transmitted to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in Figure 30-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side through a through hole at position T in the diagram, and then connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side at position T in the diagram. At this position, it is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side through the through hole again, and then connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

In this way, the first input circuit that detects the input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for game control, connects to the game control microcomputer via the data bus. A second input circuit that detects an input signal from a second input component that has higher importance than the first input component is connected directly to the data bus without being connected to the data bus. It is connected to the game control microcomputer, and the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is transmitted through the data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since the input data based on important input signals is transmitted to the gaming control microcomputer without going through any intermediaries, the input data based on important input signals is not affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. It will be transmitted.

(Effect 6)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuit. According to such a configuration, the input circuit that transmits input data based on input signals from electronic components (input components) used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer is connected to the game control microcomputer. The input circuit is connected to the data bus in such a way that the wiring pattern to the gaming control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit that outputs output signals to electronic components (output components) based on the output data transmitted from the input circuit. Data can be prevented from being affected by noise and the like.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit, but the output circuit is connected to the input circuit. It is also possible to connect to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the game control microcomputer. An output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) transmits input data to the gaming control microcomputer based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the gaming control microcomputer. Since the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so as to be shorter than the input circuit, the output data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer; a second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that performs display according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, and the first output circuit includes: It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the first output circuit outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game, and the second output circuit outputs the output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game. Since the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that it is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs output signals to the components, the output data may be affected by noise etc. It is possible to prevent the operation of the movable part from being affected in accordance with the progress.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. The output circuit may be configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit. A second output circuit outputs an output signal to a second output component that performs display, and a first output circuit outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game. is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is short, which prevents output data from being affected by noise and other factors that affect the display as the game progresses. can.

In addition, like the game control board of Example 1, the first ground area where low voltage components are mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and the first ground area where high voltage components are mounted on the right side. When a two-ground area is formed, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game often belongs to high-voltage components. The second output circuit, which is mounted in the second ground area and outputs an output signal to the second output part that displays according to the progress of the game, is mounted in the first ground area because it often belongs to low voltage parts. The Rukoto. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the gaming control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit, and the second output circuit is connected to the first ground. By mounting the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, in the second ground region, there is no need to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, in the second ground region, which prevents a load from being applied to the second output circuit. can.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. Electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected from the data bus through the through hole is output on the mounting surface according to the progress of the game. It is characterized by branching into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for playing the game and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. According to such a configuration, the second output for outputting according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through hole from the data bus formed on the solder surface. The wiring pattern connected to the circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting output signals according to the progress of the game to external equipment are to be branched, so in order to branch to each of these wiring patterns, Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the solder surface to the mounting surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and for transmitting output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. a first input circuit that transmits input data based on an input signal from a first input component used to control the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, and a first input circuit that is used to control the game control microcomputer. A second input circuit transmits input data based on input signals from two input components to the game control microcomputer, and a second output circuit transmits input data to the first output component and second output component based on output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. The first output circuit, the first output circuit, and the second output circuit are connected to a gaming control microcomputer via a data bus. , the second input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the game control microcomputer without a data bus. According to such a configuration, the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is used for game control without going through the data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the microcomputer, input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit. .

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus, input circuit, and output circuit are connected through a through hole to the mounting surface opposite to the solder surface on which the data bus is formed, by a wiring pattern that branches out. It is said that According to such a configuration, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.

In the gaming control board of this embodiment, connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from outside the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus is opposite to one side of the gaming control board. It is characterized by being formed in an area closer to the other side (lower side). According to this configuration, an area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits can be secured between the connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) and the data bus, so that the board area can be used effectively. .

The gaming control board of this embodiment is equipped with a performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine, and a third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator outputs an output signal to other indicators. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern up to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs. According to such a configuration, the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance display device is more connected to the gaming control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to other display devices. By shortening the wiring pattern, it is possible to make it difficult to tamper with display contents due to the placement of illegal parts.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted so that the orientation of the components is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily understand the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise removal circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and output circuit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this second embodiment, and even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention, they are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Furthermore, configurations that are the same as or similar to those of the first embodiment have the same effects as those described in the first embodiment. Furthermore, the modifications illustrated in the first embodiment are also applicable to the second embodiment.

The structure of the game control board in Example 3 will be explained. Similar to Examples 1 and 2, the game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, no electronic components are mounted on the other surface, and terminals included in the electronic components are soldered. In addition, the game control board in Example 3 is characterized by the structure of the electronic components and through-holes mounted, and here, the structure of the electronic components and the through-holes will be explained.

30-23 are perspective views showing the structure of specific electronic components mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above of the specific electronic components, and (B) is , is a perspective view from below of the specific electronic component.

The specified electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch, and the lower part of the specified electronic component has a mounting plate for fixing the specified electronic component to the board, as shown in Figures 30-23 (A) and (B). fixed terminals 1 and 2 that are used for the purpose of propagating signals and power of specific electronic components; connection terminals that are connected to the wiring pattern of the board and used for propagating signals and power of specific electronic components; is provided. Further, above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side surface of the specific electronic component, the model number of the specific electronic component is stamped or printed.

In this embodiment, a key switch having both a fixing terminal and a connection terminal is exemplified as the specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be used as the specific electronic component. An electronic component that does not include a fixing terminal but only has a connection terminal may be used as the specific electronic component.

The through hole provided in the game control board consists of a normal through hole and a specific through hole. Normally, as shown in Figure 30-24 (A), through-holes are plated with copper, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner circumferential surface of the through-hole, so that the through-hole is connected to the mounting surface and the solder surface. It is a through-hole that conducts through. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 30-24 (B), a specific through hole is a through hole in which copper plating is not applied to the inner peripheral surface of the through hole, and the through hole does not conduct between the mounting surface and the solder surface. be.

Normally, when soldering a through hole from the solder side, as shown in Figure 30-24 (A), the through hole is copper plated, so the solder inside the through hole reaches the mounting surface. However, when soldering to a specific through hole from the solder side, as shown in Figure 30-24 (B), the inside of the through hole must be soldered because copper plating is not applied inside the through hole. This prevents solder from flowing up and reaching the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 into the specific through holes, inserting the connecting terminals into the normal through holes, and soldering from the solder side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted into the specified through holes and fixed by soldering from the soldering surface side, so the solder does not reach the mounting surface, so when soldering, the solder It is possible to prevent problems such as the model number printed or engraved above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 being hidden by the solder because it is too high on the mounting surface side where components are mounted.

In particular, if the model number is hidden by solder, there is a risk that it will not be discovered even if a part is illegally replaced.Furthermore, if the model number is hidden during the type test, the component configuration cannot be identified and the test will not pass, resulting in approval. There is a risk that the terminals with the model number printed or engraved on the top may not be approved for installation at the gaming parlor because the model number cannot be confirmed at the time of installation at the gaming parlor. This problem can be prevented by fixing with.

On the other hand, fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used for propagating signals or power from specific electronic components, so problems may occur if the electrical connection becomes weak when soldering through specific through holes. Never. On the other hand, since the connection terminal is usually inserted through a through hole and fixed by soldering from the soldering surface side, the electrical connection can be ensured by the solder reaching the mounting surface.

(Effect 7)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. A terminal is inserted into a through hole that penetrates the surface and the solder surface, and the terminal is fixed by soldering the through hole and the terminal, forming a specific through hole to which a specific electronic component among multiple electronic components is fixed. The specific through hole is characterized in that the solder surface of the mounting surface is not electrically conductive, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the solder surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the specific through hole does not conduct between the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the soldering surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. At this time, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much to the mounting surface side on which electronic components are mounted and causing problems.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that terminals for fixing specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into specific through holes and soldered. According to this configuration, the specific through hole is soldered to the specific through hole because the terminals for fixing the specific electronic component (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are soldered to the specific through hole, so that the solder does not reach the mounting surface. By not doing so, there will be no problem even if the electrical connection becomes weak.

The game control board of this embodiment has a structure in which terminals for fixing specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into specific through holes and soldered. A configuration may also be used in which terminals (connection terminals) for transmitting component signals and power are inserted and soldered. With this configuration, solder does not rise too much to the mounting surface where electronic components are mounted. It is possible to prevent problems caused by short circuits between terminals that transmit signals and power of specific electronic components and other terminals.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or engraved) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much to the mounting surface side on which electronic components are mounted and hiding the model number of the specific electronic component.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this third embodiment, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Furthermore, configurations that are the same as or similar to those of the first and second embodiments have the same effects as those described in the first and second embodiments. Moreover, the modifications illustrated in Examples 1 and 2 are also applicable to Example 3.

(Invention of characteristic part 053SG)
As explained above, the feature section 053SG includes the following inventions. In other words, conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines have generally been equipped with a board on which electronic devices are mounted, as described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-93428. As this type of board, one has been proposed that inputs and outputs data between a control means such as a CPU and other electronic equipment using one data bus. In this type of board, various problems exist regarding the design of the wiring pattern. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine in which the wiring pattern of the board is suitably formed, the gaming machine of feature part 053SG (1) is as follows:
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. includes a data bus that is
The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the output circuit.
According to this feature, an input circuit that transmits input data to the control means based on an input signal from an electronic component used for controlling the control means outputs data to the electronic component based on output data transmitted from the control means. Since the wiring pattern up to the control means is connected to the data bus so as to be shorter than the output circuit that outputs the signal, input data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine (2) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in (1),
The board (game control board) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The gaming machine (3) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in (1) or (2),
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected through a through hole to a surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface (soldering surface) on which the data bus is formed by a wiring pattern that branches out. It is a feature.
According to this feature, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine (4) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3),
On the board (game control board), connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from outside the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus is connected to the board (game control board). It is characterized in that it is formed in a region near the other side (lower side) opposite to the one side of the control board).
According to this feature, an area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits can be secured between the connector and the data bus, so that the board area can be used effectively.

The gaming machine (5) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4),
A performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine is mounted on the board (gaming control board),
The output circuit (third output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the performance display device is more effective than the output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the other display device. The device is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus in such a way that the wiring pattern up to the microcomputer (for use with the computer) is short.
According to this feature, the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance display device has a shorter wiring pattern to the control means than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to other display devices, so it is possible to prevent unauthorized parts from being used. It is possible to make it difficult to tamper with the display contents by changing the arrangement of the display, etc.

The gaming machine (6) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5),
The input circuit and the output circuit are characterized in that they are mounted on the board so that their components are oriented in different directions.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily understand the difference between an input circuit and an output circuit.

The gaming machine (7) of characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6),
The data bus is characterized in that it is connected to the noise removal circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the control means.

The gaming machine (8) of feature part 053SG is,
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
The output circuit outputs an output to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal, and a second electronic component (second output circuit) that performs display according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component);
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the second output circuit (second output circuit). It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the first output circuit outputs an output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game, and the first output circuit outputs the output signal to the second electronic component that performs the display according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since it is connected to the data bus in such a way that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is not affected by noise etc. This can prevent the operation of the parts from being affected.

The gaming machine (9) of feature part 053SG is,
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. includes a data bus that is
The board (game control board) has electronic components mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface), and is connected to the data bus through a through hole. A first wiring pattern (a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit) for outputting the wiring pattern on the first surface (mounting surface) according to the progress of the game on the first surface (mounting surface). It is characterized by branching into a second wiring pattern (a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal) for outputting an output signal to an external device in accordance with the progress of the game.
According to this feature, the data bus formed on the second side is connected to the first side by using the wiring pattern on the first side through the through hole to perform output according to the progress of the game on the first side. Since the wiring pattern and the output signal according to the progress of the game are branched to the second wiring pattern for outputting to the external device, the wiring pattern is formed on the second side in order to branch into the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern, respectively. Since there is no need to branch the data bus to the first surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The gaming machine (10) of feature part 053SG is,
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
a first input that transmits input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used to control the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer); A circuit (first input circuit) and input data based on input signals from a second electronic component (second input component) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are input to the control means (microcomputer for game control). A second input circuit (second input circuit) transmits to the microcomputer) and a third electronic component (first output component, second output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). an output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the component);
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus,
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is characterized in that it is connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) without going through the data bus.
According to this feature, the input data based on the input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without going through the data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the control means without being influenced by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit.

The gaming machine (11) of feature part 053SG is,
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. including a data bus that is
The output circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the input circuit.
According to this feature, the output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means outputs the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means. Since the output data is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the input circuit that transmits data to the control means, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine (12) of feature part 053SG is,
A gaming machine that can play games,
A control means (microcomputer for game control) and input data based on input signals from electronic components (input parts) used to control the control means (microcomputer for game control) are transmitted to the control means (microcomputer for game control). ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (microcomputer for game control). , includes a board (gaming control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is commonly used for transmitting input data from the input circuit to the control means (microcomputer for game control) and for transmitting output data from the control means (microcomputer for game control) to the output circuit. includes a data bus that is
The output circuit outputs an output to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable part according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal, and a second electronic component (second output circuit) that performs display according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component);
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the first output circuit (first output circuit). It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second electronic component that performs display according to the progress of the game is connected to the first electronic component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since it is connected to the data bus in such a way that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the first output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is not affected by noise, etc., so the display changes depending on the progress of the game. can be prevented from affecting.

In the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of game balls may be placed inside the game machine. The ball is recyclably enclosed, and the number of balls lent out in response to a player's loan request and the number of prize balls given in response to winnings are added up, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which games are stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, scores and points are awarded to the player instead of game balls, so these awarded scores and points correspond to the gaming value.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and that has a gaming medium (for example, a game A storage section (e.g., ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing balls (P), a payout section (e.g., payout device 200) capable of dispensing game media, and a top surface of the storage section is open, and the game of the storage section is A guide path forming section (for example, a first guide path forming section 202 and a second guide path forming section 204) forming a guide path (for example, a first guide path and a second guide path) for guiding the medium to the dispensing section; , a cover part (for example, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, a third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part, , a predetermined restriction part (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recesses) for restricting the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen onto the cover part from falling into the guide passage forming part. grooves 326A to 326C, recesses 336) (see FIGS. 22 and 24), and grooves 326A to 326C, recesses 336) are provided in the guide passage forming part for restricting the movement of screw members that have fallen into the guiding passage forming part to the dispensing part. A plurality of restriction portions (for example, hole portions 271A to 271H) are provided (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 27), and the predetermined restriction portion is provided with a screw member (for example, screw member N1) that has fallen onto the cover portion. -N6, N11-N16) on the cover part, including a first retention part (for example, elongated hole 316A to 316C) and a second retention part (for example, groove 326A to 326C), The second retention part is provided at a position closer to the payout part (for example, the payout device 200) than the first retention part, is larger than the first retention part (L22B>L21), and furthermore, the second retention part is A predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern) is provided as an operable operation means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) and a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates. and a special vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern). A performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance processing in step S172 using the vibration control data of the display performance control pattern), and a light emission performance that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration performance (for example, an operation part performance pattern). Light emission effect execution means (e.g., the variable light emission effect in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operating part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 A performance control CPU 120 that executes performance processing during display, etc.), and a specific performance execution means (such as a performance control CPU 120 that executes performance processing during display), and a specific performance execution means that can execute a specific performance (for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game. For example, a production control CPU 120 that executes the variable display production process in step S172 based on the variable display production control pattern determined in step AKS203, When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher (for example, jackpot reliability according to the operation part effect pattern, etc.), and the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect is higher. and the timing at which the predetermined vibration performance is executed, the rate at which the advantageous state is controlled differs (for example, the jackpot reliability depends on the luminous color included in the operation part performance pattern and the use of the operation part performance pattern). etc.), the vibration performance execution means is capable of executing the special vibration performance in conjunction with execution of the specific performance (for example, execution of vibration performance during periods AKZ01 to AKZ05, etc.), and is capable of executing the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance. Examples include gaming machines in which the vibration mode is different between the two (for example, the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 are different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44).

According to such a configuration, the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part can be prevented from falling into the guide passage forming part. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming section from entering the dispensing section. Moreover, since the screw member becomes more likely to be retained in the retention part as it approaches the dispensing part, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen onto the cover part from moving and falling into the guide passage forming part. In addition, it is possible to improve the game's interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

In other words, by preventing screw members from falling or getting mixed into the guide passage forming part or the payout part, it is possible to create a game machine that is less likely to malfunction, and also to provide a light emitting mode in which a predetermined vibration effect is controlled in a favorable state. Since it is possible to draw attention to whether or not a vibration performance is executed at the execution timing or whether a special vibration performance is executed in conjunction with the execution of a specific performance, the game enjoyment can be improved. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to break down and more likely to attract players' interest when installed in a gaming parlor.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can prevent screw members from falling or getting mixed into the guiding passage forming part or the dispensing part, and which can improve the enjoyment of the game, it is possible to A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled by a player (such as a gaming state), and includes an operation means (for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by a player, and vibrations caused by the vibration of the operation means. The effects include predetermined vibration effects (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using vibration patterns included in the operation section effect pattern) and special vibration effects (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern). Vibration effect execution means (for example, for effect control that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part effect control pattern and the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) CPU 120, etc.), and a light emitting effect execution means capable of executing a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect (e.g., emitting light from the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to a light emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern). (For example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) and the specific performance (for example, SP Reach A reach effect, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, etc.)) (for example, the variable display effect processing in step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) (e.g. CPU 120 for effect control), when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher (for example, when the predetermined vibration effect is (e.g., jackpot reliability according to a part performance pattern, etc.), the rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is determined according to the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the predetermined vibration performance, and the timing at which the predetermined vibration performance is executed. The vibration performance execution means is capable of executing the special vibration performance in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance. Yes (for example, execution of a vibration effect during periods AKZ01 to AKZ05), and the vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, a vibration pattern AKV01 to AKV03 that is different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.) can be mentioned. Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

FIG. 31 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 33). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 33), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 31), a movable body 32 is provided that operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) that is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 33).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 33).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 32 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged at the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the first prize winning hole and the second prize winning hole (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is determined by the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the first and second prize openings (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. It is a percentage. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward a game area by a player's rotational operation of a ball-hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo-like multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (the jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 33, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, performance control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary figure hold display 25C, and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), the game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big prize opening, the occurrence of a prize, the number of pending memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc., are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has the function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 123 to perform a performance (a process for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and indicates the content of the operation as appropriate). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The performance random number may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 34, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the settings confirmation start command or the settings change start command, control may be performed to notify that settings are being confirmed or settings are being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 35 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The effect control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 35 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the production control board 12. In the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the presentation content (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 37 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 37(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 37(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the second special figure. A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as a "jackpot" special figure than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value has been assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values so as to be continuous from a common numerical range of jackpot determination values.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the setting value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (for executing a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 38 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 39, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., a determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may also be distributed by being installed on a storage device owned by the software. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios may be "0%" and the other ratio may be "100%" or a ratio less than "100%."

(Explanation of features related to setting suggestion effects)
Hereinafter, the characteristic parts regarding the setting suggestion performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. In this characteristic part, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate while the variable display is being executed.

FIG. 40-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the production control process process as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of decorative symbols, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of decorative symbols, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, a preview performance determination process is executed (step S202). The preview performance determination process enables determining the preview performance included in the advantageous suggestion performance.

After the preview performance determination process is executed, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S203). The performance control pattern may include a special symbol variation performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various performance executions. For example, in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, one of a plurality of prepared special symbol variation performance control patterns is selected and set as the pattern to be used. Further, in accordance with the determination result of the preview performance determination process in step S202, one of the plurality of prepared preview performance control patterns may be selected and set as the usage pattern. In addition, the production control pattern at the time of special figure change and the advance notice production control pattern are not limited to those that set separate production control patterns, but one production control pattern that corresponds to the combination of execution settings of each production. There may be.

When the production control pattern is determined in step S203, for example, the initial stage of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (production control timer setting section, etc.) corresponds to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. A value is set (step S204). Further, settings are made to start changing decorative patterns and the like on the screen of the image display device 5 (step S205). At this time, by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure variation production control pattern) determined in step S203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, It is sufficient to start the variation of the decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the pending display update setting at the time of starting the variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display area corresponding to the hold number "1" (leftmost display area) is erased (disappeared), and other hold numbers "2" to The pending display in the display area corresponding to "4" etc. is moved (shifted) to the left one by one. As a result, the pending display is shifted. The active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5 may display an active display corresponding to the pending display that has been erased (expired) in the pending display area. In addition, if the number of pending memories is "0" and the variable display starts immediately based on the occurrence of the first starting prize or the second starting winning, the active display area will not be updated without updating the pending display. Settings may be made to update the active display in . Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S207), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

FIG. 40-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether a super reach effect is to be executed (step S221). Whether or not the super reach effect is executed can be determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example.

If the super reach effect is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol at the time of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is ended. When there is no reach, the variable display result will be "losing". At the time of normal reach, there are cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot" and cases where the variable display result is a "loss". When the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is not a ready-to-reach mode, a determined decorative symbol of a non-reachable combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined so that the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R have different (inconsistent) decorative symbols. At the time of a normal reach where the variable display result is "lose", the determined decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R have the same (matching) decorative symbol. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determined decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the jackpot. The final stopped symbol at the time of a jackpot is determined so that the same (matching) decorative symbol is displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the reach effect of super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol at the time of super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and cases where the variable display result becomes a "loss". At the time of super reach where the variable display result is "lose", the determined decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. At the time of a jackpot where the variable display result is a "jackpot", the final decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the jackpot.

At the time of super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "loss", the same (matching) decorative pattern will be displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. It will be stopped and displayed as a fixed decorative pattern. The left and right decorative symbols that constitute such reach-loss combinations and jackpot combinations are also referred to as reach-to-reach symbols. Decorative patterns that can be determined as ready-to-reach symbols may include a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as seven types of decorative patterns corresponding to numbers 1 to 7, for example. The decorative pattern corresponding to the number may be only a presentation image showing the number, or may be a presentation image showing various characters in addition to the number. The ready-to-win symbol is determined to be one of a plurality of decorative symbols by referring to the ready-to-reach symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the ready-to-win symbol. Just do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the ready-to-win symbol may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the ready-to-win symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to decorative symbols that are ready-to-win symbols may vary depending on whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot." For example, when the variable display result is a "lose", the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is highest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As it becomes, the determination rate of the decorative pattern becomes lower, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of the decorative patterns corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As the number increases, the determination rate of the decorative pattern increases, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the highest. With such a determination ratio setting, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the percentage of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state becomes the highest, and 6 , 5, 4, 3, and 2, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" when it is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and the percentage of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is low. Therefore, the variable display result when the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern becomes a "jackpot", and the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot game state becomes the lowest. In addition, in the ready-to-win symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols that are ready-to-win symbols may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "lose" or "jackpot". The number of judgment values assigned may be different for each decorative pattern that becomes a ready-to-win pattern, or the number of judgment values allocated may be the same regardless of the decorative pattern that becomes a ready-to-win pattern. Depending on the jackpot type, the determination ratio of decorative symbols that become reach symbols may differ.

Following step S223, it is determined whether the determined ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is ended. If the ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of a setting suggestion performance is determined depending on whether or not the setting suggestion performance is to be executed (step S225). Whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared, based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. All you have to do is make it so. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance is determined to be either "no performance", which does not execute the setting suggestion performance, or "with performance", which executes the setting suggestion performance.

Based on the determination result in step S225, it is determined whether or not it has been determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed (with effect) (step S226). If it is determined that the setting suggestion performance is not executed (step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is ended. If it is determined that there is an effect (step S226; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S227). The performance control CPU 120 receives the setting value notification command sent from the main board 11 when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and stores the notified setting value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Thereby, in step S227, the setting value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, a setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and then the stop symbol determination process is ended. The setting suggestion pattern is selected from among a plurality of setting suggestion patterns by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating random values for setting suggestion pattern determination. It would be better if it were decided accordingly. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 40-3 shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance table data constituting the determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 40-3 as a setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of setting suggestion performance is determined by referring to the determination table TA01. In the decision table TA01, the number of determination values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance differs depending on whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of "with effect" for performing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is a "loss". With such setting of the determination ratio, when the setting suggestion performance is executed, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher than when the setting suggestion performance is not executed. In addition, in the setting suggestion performance execution determination table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot". .

FIG. 40-4(A) shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as the plurality of setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggestion contents depending on whether or not to change the symbol display color and the display color when changing. The symbol display color is the display color of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol, and can be changed to a suggested display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to red, which is the normal display color. Pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color and suggests that the level of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is low. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, indicating that the set value is 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the level of expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, indicating that 6 is the highest set value. In this manner, in the setting suggestion performance using the ready-to-reach symbols, it is possible to make suggestions regarding the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1, depending on whether the symbol display color has changed or not, and the symbol display color after the change.

FIG. 40-4(B) shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 40-4(B) as a setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, a setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11. In the determination table TA11, there are parts where the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When a setting suggestion performance using a ready-to-win symbol is executed, since the ready-to-win symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is high. When the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-0, the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low, and when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-1, the setting value is 2 or more. One thing is certain. Furthermore, when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-2, the expectation level is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-3, the setting value is the highest. It is confirmed that it is 6. In this way, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the reach mode includes a symbol display mode that gives a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a 7. It includes a pattern display mode that provides suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state, such as decorative patterns corresponding to numbers, and also provides suggestions regarding the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. If the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the symbol display color is changed after the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. Suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state will be continuously made, and suggestions regarding the setting values will be made.

The setting suggestion performance can be executed in different manners depending on the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-1, so the symbol display color is not changed to copper color. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color is changed as the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. The difference is whether or not it is changed to copper color. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-3, so the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko game machine is 6 or not, the symbol display color is gold as the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. The difference is whether or not it is changed.

The setting suggestion effect is instead of changing the display color of a decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol, or in addition to changing the display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, the display of background images, outer frame images, and other arbitrary performance images, the output of audio from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, the operation of movable performance members, and the like, It may be possible to change the presentation mode by any presentation device, such as a combination of some or all of them. Setting suggestion effects and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be performed using arbitrary data related to effect control, arbitrary data not related to effect control, or data that is a combination of these, predetermined for execution of the effect. It only needs to be executable when one or more conditional expressions are satisfied. The effect of changing the symbol display color is also referred to as a change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns that can be determined only when controlled to a jackpot gaming state and patterns that can be determined even when not controlled to a jackpot gaming state. For example, patterns RE-0 and RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined rate even if the variable display result is a "loss", whereas patterns RE-2 and RE-3 can be determined with a variable display result. It may be possible to make a determination at a predetermined rate only when the result is a "jackpot", and to make it impossible to determine when the variable display result is a "loss". In this case, pattern RE-2 is determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value set in pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas pattern RE-3 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at different rates depending on the setting value.

FIG. 40-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the performance control process process as the variable display performance process. In the variable display production process, it is determined whether or not a special figure variation time, which is a variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, for example (step S241). If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The performance control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the performance control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, etc. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, turned off, or blinked. It is only necessary that a predetermined performance device can perform various performances by operating a movable member for performance such as the movable body 32, or by combining some or all of these.

In the variable display performance process, it is determined whether or not it is a preview performance period (step S242). If it is the preview performance period (step S242; Yes), control is performed to execute the preview performance (step S243). If it is not the preview performance period (step S242; No), or after performing the control in step S243, it is determined whether it is the ready-to-reach performance period (step S244). If it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S244; Yes), control is performed to execute the ready-to-win effect (step S245). By the control in step S245, when executing the ready-to-win effect after changing the symbol display color after the decorative symbols that become ready-to-win symbols are stopped and displayed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are made, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Suggestions regarding setting values can be made.

If it is not the ready-to-win performance period (step S244; No), or after performing the control in step S245, it is determined whether or not it is the change performance period (step S246). The change performance period may be predetermined as an execution period of a performance that changes the symbol display color when a setting suggestion performance using a ready-to-win symbol is executed. If it is the change performance period (step S246; Yes), control is performed to execute the change performance (step S247). If it is not the change performance period (step S246; No), or after the control in step S247 is performed, the decorative pattern may be changed in other ways based on the settings in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, for example. After performing control to execute the effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect processing during the variable display is ended.

The change performance period may be set to different lengths of time depending on the performance mode of the change performance. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period, which is longer than the first period, and pattern RE- In the case of pattern 2, the change effect period may be set to a third period which is longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest period, the fourth period. Generally, when a performance that informs an advantageous situation (advantageous performance) is executed, a player takes an image or video of that performance with a mobile terminal owned by the player, and posts it on SNS (Social Media). They tend to post on membership-based websites such as Networking Service) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, a problem arises in that an appropriate photographing time cannot be secured. On the other hand, effects that are often performed even in unfavorable situations (unfavorable effects) do not stimulate the desire to take pictures, so if the unfavorable effects are carried out for a long time, they may end up making players feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period of disadvantageous effects is made shorter than that of advantageous effects to reduce discomfort. Thereby, when a performance advantageous to the player is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing it, and it is also possible to secure time for taking pictures. Further, by securing the shooting time, the captured images and videos can be made public by the players on the Internet, and the public's interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased. In addition, in many cases, the photos taken at which pachinko machine 1 in which gaming parlor are made public, and from the perspective of the gaming parlor, the player is advertising the gaming parlor. become. In this way, by securing the photographing time when a suggestion regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 is made, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the players but also to the game parlor side.

If the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S249; No), the variable display performance process is ended and the process waits. In addition, after the variable display time has elapsed, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving a symbol confirmation command, a predetermined error process will be executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation command normally. You may also do so. When the symbol confirmation command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (confirmed ornamental symbol) that will be the display result in the variable display of decorative symbols (step S250). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as a waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step S251). Further, after updating the value of the production process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S252), the variable display production process is ended.

FIG. 40-6 shows an example of execution of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 40-6(A) shows an example of performance execution HD101 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a ready-to-win mode and a ready-to-win is achieved. Decorative symbols corresponding to the number 7 are stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, whereby a reach is established and a reach effect of normal reach is executed. FIG. 40-6(B) shows a performance execution example HD102 in which the reach performance of normal reach progresses to the reach performance of super reach. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size, and the effect image in the reach effect of super reach is displayed. FIG. 40-6(C) shows a performance execution example HD 103 in which a change performance that is a setting suggestion performance is executed. A production display corresponding to the change production is displayed superimposed on the reach-to-reach symbol that is being stopped and displayed. Furthermore, a suggestion to change the symbol display color is made by displaying an effect image that notifies the user of a message such as "Change symbol display color!!".

FIG. 40-6 (D1) shows an effect execution example HD111 in which the symbol display color does not change due to pattern RE-0. FIG. 40-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the symbol display color changes to copper color by pattern RE-1. FIG. 40-6 (D3) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to silver according to pattern RE-2. FIG. 40-6 (D4) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to gold according to pattern RE-3. In the performance execution example HD111, the display color of the ready-to-win symbol does not change due to the pattern RE-0, and remains unchanged at the normal display color of red. In this way, a failed performance (falsified performance) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the level of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is low. In the effect execution example HD112, the display color of the ready-to-reach symbol is changed to copper color by pattern RE-1, thereby indicating that the set value is 2 or more. In the performance execution example HD113, the display color of the ready-to-win symbol is changed to silver by pattern RE-2, which suggests that the level of expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. In the effect execution example HD114, the display color of the ready-to-reach symbol is changed to gold by pattern RE-3, thereby suggesting that 6, which is the highest set value, is confirmed.

Setting suggestion effects include not only changing effects that can change the display color of the reach symbols, but also suggesting the expected level of jackpot through arbitrary effects such as pseudo-continuous effects and look-ahead preview effects, as well as setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may also be possible to make suggestions regarding. During execution of the variable display, a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. When executing any performance, there are two cases in which suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are continuously made after making suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, and cases in which suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are continuously made and the pachinko player It may also include a case where suggestions regarding setting values of the gaming machine 1 are made. When executing an arbitrary performance, there are two cases in which the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then the suggestion ends, and another case in which the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continued and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is concerned. It may also include a case where a suggestion is made.

The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether or not setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the effect is made so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed by giving a suggestion based on the effect mode of the pattern that is determined at a high rate. It is possible to diversify the game and improve the interest in the game.

While the variable display is being executed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state may be made, but suggestions regarding the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "Jackpot", the pachinko game machine A suggestion regarding the setting value of 1 may be made. There may be cases where a suggestion regarding the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made without making any suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state.

Instead of part or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or together with some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions are made regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and is different from the jackpot gaming state. It may be something. For example, it may provide a suggestion regarding a variable probability state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a suggestion may be made depending on whether or not to be controlled regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is awarded.

(Explanation of characteristic part 10SH)
Next, the characteristic part 10SH of this embodiment will be explained.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. For example, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes an operation means that can be operated by a player. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes a vibration performance execution means capable of executing a vibration performance in which the operating means vibrates. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a vibration performance in which the push button 31B vibrates.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes a line-of-sight guide performance execution means that can execute a line-of-sight guide performance that guides the player's line of sight to the operating means. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a line-of-sight guidance performance that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B.

The gaming machine according to the feature part 10SH is expected to be controlled in an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. For example, in the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed.

The vibration effect execution means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect at the first timing and at the second timing after the first timing. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to control the production control CPU 120 at any one of timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols starts, timing T2 when reach is established, and normal reach after timing T1 and timing T2. The vibration effect can be executed at either timing T3 when the reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed.

The vibration effect execution means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may press the push button 31B regardless of whether the timing is one of timing T1 and timing T2, or timing T3 and timing T4. It is possible to perform a vibration performance in a manner in which the vibration time and the luminous color are the same.

The line-of-sight guidance performance execution means related to the feature section 10SH does not execute the line-of-sight guidance performance at the first timing. For example, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the gaze guidance performance at timing T1 and timing T2.

The line-of-sight guidance performance execution means related to the feature section 10SH can execute the line-of-sight guidance performance before the vibration performance is executed at the second timing. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance performance before the vibration performance is executed at timing T3 and timing T4.

The vibration effect execution means related to the feature section 10SH is capable of executing the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the vibration performance while the line-of-sight guidance performance is being performed.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance different from the vibration performance and the eye-guide performance. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance.

The vibration effect execution means related to the feature section 10SH is capable of executing a vibration effect when a specific effect is being executed. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a vibration performance when a super reach performance is being executed.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes a display means for displaying. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5 that displays various performance images.

The display of the line-of-sight guiding effect related to the characteristic portion 10SH has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information, and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information. For example, the performance image for the eye-guiding performance has a lower priority than a constant small pattern, a pending number display, and various error notifications, and a higher priority than a pending display, an active display, a background image, and a decorative pattern.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 41-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 10SH, and shows the arrangement layout of the main components.

The push button 31B is formed of a translucent member, and a game effect lamp 9B for game effects is provided inside the push button 31B. According to such a configuration, the push button 31B can be caused to emit light by lighting the game effect lamp 9B.

Further, the push button 31B is configured to be able to vibrate by being driven by the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 is, for example, an eccentric motor in which a weight with a biased center of gravity is provided on the motor shaft, and is provided inside or close to the push button 31B. Note that a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided in order to provide various vibration modes for the push button 31B.

Game effect lamps 9L and 9R for game effects are provided at predetermined positions of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The game effect lamp 9L is provided on the left side of the push button 31B, and extends from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 outward to the left and right. Similarly, the game effect lamp 9R is provided on the right side of the push button 31B, and extends from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 outward to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs are built into the game effect lamps 9L and 9R along the extending direction of the game effect lamps 9L and 9R.

(Substrate configuration)
FIG. 41-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 10SH.

The display control unit 123 supplies a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 in order to turn on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R, and drives the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R based on the lamp signal, and produces game effects in a manner specified by the lamp signal. Turn on/off lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls lighting/extinguishing of the lamp. Note that the control of turning on/off the lamps may be executed by the performance control CPU 120.

For example, a motor control board 130 is mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display control unit 123 supplies a motor signal to the motor control board 130 in order to drive the vibration motor 131 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The motor control board 130 is equipped with various circuits for driving the vibration motor 131, and drives the vibration motor 131 in a manner specified by the motor signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the vibration motor 131. Note that the control of the vibration motor 131 may be executed by the performance control CPU 120.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 41-3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing related to the feature section 10SH. The effect control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 41-3 in the variable display start setting process of FIG. 39.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variation pattern of the variable display to be executed from now on and the display result of the variable display to be executed from now on (step 10SHS1). The variation pattern and the display result are transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display and are specified by the effect control command analyzed in the command analysis process. The final stop symbol is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Here, the lottery refers to a determination method using random numbers and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. As the random number value, one of the random numbers for effect that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random number for effect updating process is used.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the vibration performance and the execution pattern of the vibration performance when executing the vibration performance (step 10SHS2). The vibration effect is an effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration performance that is not linked to a preview performance. In the process of step 10SHS2, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the vibration production is to be executed and the execution pattern of the vibration production when executing the vibration production, using random numbers and a lottery based on a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. decide.

In the table referenced in the lottery in step 10 SHS2, when the vibration effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the vibration effect is not executed, and when the vibration effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is determined according to the execution pattern of the vibration effect. The determined value to be compared with the random number value may be assigned to the determination result of the presence or absence of the vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect so that the vibration effects are different.

Here, the jackpot reliability of a certain performance A is, for example, (probability that performance A will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result will be a "jackpot")/{(display result Probability that effect A will be executed when is a “jackpot”) × (probability that the display result will be a “jackpot”) + (probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is not a “jackpot”) x ( Probability that the display result will not be a "jackpot")]

Therefore, in the table referred to in the lottery in step 10SHS2, the vibration effect of each execution pattern is set so that the jackpot reliability according to the execution pattern of the vibration effect becomes a predetermined value when the display result becomes "jackpot". It is sufficient that the probability of execution and the probability that the vibration performance of each execution pattern is executed when the display result does not become a "jackpot" are stipulated.

(Contents of vibration performance and jackpot reliability)
FIG. 41-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration performance and the jackpot reliability. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment uses execution patterns SE1 to SE1 to It is possible to perform multiple types of vibration effects of SE10.

The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration performance at either timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started or timing T2 when reach is established. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the vibration performance at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started, it does not perform the vibration performance at the timing T2 when the reach is established. Furthermore, when executing the vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is established, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is capable of executing vibration effects of execution patterns SE1 to SE3 as vibration effects at timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration performance of the execution pattern SE4 as the vibration performance at timing T2 when the reach is achieved.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment operates between timing T3, which is after timing T1 and timing T2, when the normal reach reach performance is being executed, and timing T4 when the super reach reach performance is being executed. The vibration effect can be performed at any of the timings. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the vibration performance at timing T3 when the normal reach performance is being executed, it does not execute the vibration performance at timing T4 when the super reach performance is being executed. Furthermore, when executing the vibration effect at timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is capable of executing the vibration effects of execution patterns SE5 to SE7 as vibration effects at timing T3 during execution of the normal reach effect. Further, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration performance of execution patterns SE8 to SE10 as the vibration performance at timing T4 while the super reach performance is being executed.

According to such a configuration, since the vibration effect may be performed while the super reach effect is being performed, it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment is configured to control whether the variable display of decorative symbols is started at timing T1, the normal reach reach performance is being executed at timing T3, or the super reach reach performance is being executed. Regardless of whether it is the timing T4 of It is possible to perform a vibration effect in which the light emits red light. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute vibration effects of execution patterns SE1, SE5, and SE8 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B vibrates for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light. It is. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute vibration effects of execution patterns SE2, SE6, and SE9 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits red light. It is.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment vibrates the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit rainbow color light regardless of the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed. It is possible to perform vibration effects. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes vibration effects of execution patterns SE3, SE4, SE7, and SE10 as a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors. It is possible.

In this embodiment, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light. The reliability of the jackpot is higher when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits red light is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors is 100%, and the display result is a "jackpot". will be notified definitively.

According to such a configuration, when the push button 31B vibrates, it is possible to draw attention to what color the push button 31B emits light and for how many seconds the push button 31B vibrates.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light, and when the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is pushed. When a vibration effect in which the button 31B emits red light is executed, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the execution timing of the vibration effect. For example, even if the vibration effect is the same, it is more effective when executed at timing T1 when the variable display of decorative symbols starts than when executed at timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed. Highly reliable jackpot. In addition, even if the vibration effect is the same, it is more effective when executed at timing T4 when the super reach reach effect is being executed than when executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. , the reliability of the jackpot is high.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, if the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the predetermined reach mode when the vibration effect is not executed at timing T1, the super reach effect will be used instead of the normal reach effect at timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed. It is possible to increase expectations for the vibration performance to be performed at timing T4 during execution. In fact, when the vibration effect is not executed at timing T3 when the reach effect of normal reach is being executed, expectations are further increased for the vibration effect to be executed at timing T4 when the reach effect of super reach is being executed. be able to.

Note that the jackpot reliability of the vibrating performance that can be executed at timing T3 while the normal reach performance is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the normal reach performance. In addition, if it is possible to execute multiple types of normal reach reach effects and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of normal reach reach effect, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect that can be executed at timing T3 while the normal reach reach effect is being executed is , it is sufficient that the reliability is higher than the jackpot reliability of the normal reach reach performance being executed at that time, or higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of normal reach reach performance.

Similarly, the jackpot reliability of the vibrating effect that can be executed at timing T4 while the super reach effect is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the super reach effect. In addition, if it is possible to perform multiple types of super reach reach effects and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of super reach reach effect, the vibration effect jackpot that can be executed at timing T4 while the super reach reach effect is being executed. The reliability only needs to be higher than the jackpot reliability of the super reach reach performance being executed at that time, or higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of super reach reach performance.

According to such a configuration, a vibration performance that can be performed at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being performed, or a vibration performance that can be performed at timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being performed, can be used as a chance-up performance. can do.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at timing T2 when reach is established, the vibration effect is always executed in such a manner that the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors. This will definitely notify you that the displayed result will be a "jackpot".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, rather than at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. In fact, when the vibrating effect is not executed at the timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started, expectations for the vibrating effect to be executed at the timing T2 when a reach is achieved can be further increased.

In this manner, in this embodiment, as the variable display of decorative symbols progresses, expectations for the execution of the vibration effect can be changed in a complex manner.

Furthermore, the probability that a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit rainbow-colored light is sufficiently low compared to the probability that other types of vibration effects will be executed. By specifying this, it is possible to increase the interest when it is definitely announced that the display result will be a "jackpot".

Further, in this embodiment, when the push button 31B is vibrated as a vibration effect, the push button 31B is always made to emit light.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating, and it is possible to increase the chances of making the user recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 41-3, after that, according to the determination result in step 10SHS2, the performance control CPU 120 controls the timing T3 when the normal reach reach performance is being executed and the super reach reach performance in the current variable display. It is determined whether or not the vibration effect is to be executed at any one of the timing T4 during execution (step 10SHS3).

Then, if the vibration effect is executed at either timing T3 when the normal reach reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach reach effect is being executed (step 10SHS3; Yes), the effect The control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guiding effect (step 10SHS4). The line-of-sight guidance performance is a performance that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B. In the process of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guide effect based on random numbers and a lottery based on a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. In the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4, the ratio of determining the presence or absence of the visual guidance effect is set regardless of which mode of the vibration effect is executed. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance performance at the same rate regardless of the mode of the current vibration performance.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at either timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed. It is possible to perform eye-direction effects.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the push button 31B before the vibration effect is executed, so that the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

On the other hand, when performing the vibration performance at either timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started or timing T2 when reach is established, the line-of-sight guidance performance is not performed.

Here, when the display result is derived and displayed, after the display result of "missing" is displayed, a relief effect may be executed and the true display result may be derived and displayed. Therefore, even though the display result of the previous variable display has been derived and displayed and the current variable display has started, if the eye guidance effect is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, There is a possibility that the previous variable display may give the misunderstanding that a relief effect is being executed. In contrast, in this embodiment, the line-of-sight guiding effect is not performed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, so it is possible to prevent such misunderstanding from occurring.

Furthermore, if the line-of-sight guide performance is executed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, there is a possibility that it may not be possible to appropriately recognize that the variable display mode of the decorative pattern has become a predetermined reach mode. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guide effect is not performed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the variable display mode of the decorative pattern has become a predetermined reach mode. .

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 41-3, if the vibration effect is not executed at either timing T3 when the normal reach reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach reach effect is being executed ( After executing the process of step 10SHS3; No) or step 10SHS4, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether to execute other performances such as a reach performance, the mode of the performance to be executed, etc. (step 10SHS5). Specifically, whether or not various performances such as a preview performance will be performed and their mode are determined by lottery. At this time, the reliability of the jackpot is varied depending on whether or not a preview performance is performed and its mode by varying the determination ratio in the lottery according to the current display result, the current variation pattern, etc. Furthermore, if the current pattern specifies a reach, it is determined to execute the reach effect specified by the variation pattern.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 sets the start timing of the performance determined to be executed (10SHS6). Specifically, the production control CPU 120 sets a timer value according to the special figure variation time corresponding to the current variation pattern as an initial value in the production control process timer, and also sets the type and mode of the production decided to be executed. The effect specifying data specifying the effect and the execution timing specifying timer value indicating the execution timing of the effect by comparison with the timer value of the effect control process timer are stored in a timer value storage area of the RAM 122 in association with each other. When there are a plurality of performances determined to be executed, the performance control CPU 120 stores performance specifying data and an execution timing specifying timer value for each performance in the timer value storage area.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 supplies the display control unit 123 with an instruction to start the variable display of the decorative symbols that derive the determined final stop symbol in the manner specified by the current variation pattern (10SHS7). The display control unit 123 receives the instruction and starts variable display of decorative symbols. Note that at this time, the display of the variable display compatible display may be updated.

Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to "2" (step 10SHS8), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

(Execution timing and duration of vibration effects and line-of-sight guide effects)
FIG. 41-5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution timing and performance period of the vibration performance and the eye-guide performance. As described above, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the vibration performance at either timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started or timing T2 when a reach is established. In addition, as described above, the performance control CPU 120 executes the vibration performance at either timing T3 when the normal reach reach performance is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach reach performance is being executed. It is possible.

Further, as described above, the performance control CPU 120 executes the vibration performance at either timing T3 when the normal reach reach performance is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach reach performance is being executed. In this case, it is possible to perform a line-of-sight guidance effect before that.

If the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the eye-gaze guidance performance before the vibration performance at timing T3 while the normal reach reach performance is being executed, the performance control CPU 120 starts the sight-line guidance performance 4 seconds before timing T3. , the vibration effect is started at timing T3. Similarly, in the case where the production control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the line-of-sight guide effect before executing the vibration effect at timing T4 during execution of the super reach reach effect, the line-of-sight guide effect is executed 4 seconds before timing T4. The effect is started, and when the timing T4 comes, the vibration effect is started. The production period of the gaze guidance production in this embodiment is 5 seconds. Therefore, the vibration effect is executed for the first second while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

According to such a configuration, a sense of unity is created between the vibration performance and the line-of-sight guidance performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

(Example of production operation)
FIG. 41-6 and FIG. 41-7 are diagrams illustrating an example of the production operation of the vibration production and the eye-guiding production. In this performance operation example, an example will be described in which a vibration performance is executed at timing T4 while a super reach performance is being executed.

The effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing multiple types of super reach effects. The effect control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the type of super reach in the reach effect of super reach. In this example, as shown in FIG. 41-6(A), a background image 10SHY of "mountain scenery" is displayed as a background image corresponding to the type of super reach.

In addition, when the super reach effect is started, the performance control CPU 120 displays a reduced size of the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed when the reach effect was established. In this example, as shown in FIG. 41-6(A), the "left" reach decorative symbol 10SH5L is a reduced version of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L when the reach is established. , and a "right" ready-to-reach decorative symbol 10SH5R, which is a reduced version of the decorative symbol that was stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R when the ready-to-win is established, are displayed.

Further, in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a small symbol display area 10SHK smaller than the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is provided. In the small symbol display area 10SHK, variable display of small symbols is performed in synchronization with variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. The effect image showing the small pattern is also referred to as a notification information image. Therefore, in the small pattern display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, a performance image showing a small pattern that becomes a notification information image is variably displayed, and a performance image showing a confirmed small pattern that becomes a display result is displayed. derived.

In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, small patterns different from decorative patterns are variably displayed. During the period from the start of variable display of decorative patterns until the final decorative pattern that is the display result is derived, the variable display of small patterns is continuously performed in a fixed display mode, and the small symbols disappear from the screen or are obstructed by obstacles. It will not be blocked by Therefore, the small symbol display area 10SHK is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 10SHK. The small symbols variably displayed in the small symbol display area 10SHK are also referred to as permanent small symbols or presentation small symbols. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, for example, a plurality of identifiable patterns are displayed in a display mode that is partially or completely common to each of a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as a pattern that shows numbers in the same way as a part that shows numbers in a decorative pattern. A performance image showing a type of small symbol may be variably displayed as a notification information image. Note that the small pattern may be displayed only when the decorative pattern is hidden. For example, after a variable display of a decorative pattern is displayed in a reach mode, instead of a variable display of a decorative pattern, a variable display of a small pattern is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 41-6(A). It may be displayed in the lower left corner of the .

Note that a fourth symbol is provided next to the special symbol, the decorative symbol, and the normal symbol, and the variable display of the fourth symbol may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. The variable display of the fourth symbol is, for example, repeated display and non-display in a specific display color at regular time intervals in a fourth symbol display area provided on or off the screen of the image display device 5. This is achieved by continuing display control. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth symbol, the display result in the variable display of the small symbols may be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are connected to the display screen of the image display device 5 on the right side of the gaming area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG. 41-1. is located at a remote location. Therefore, the player who is paying attention to the performance displayed on the image display device 5 becomes difficult to check the display state on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the variable display of the special symbol progresses. In some cases, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current state is in progress or whether a display result has been derived. On the other hand, by performing variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5 and deriving the display result, it is possible to determine whether variable display is in progress or not. Whether or not a display result has been derived can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

In addition, in this example, there is a pending display area 10SHH for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display area 10SHA for displaying an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. , is displayed. Note that when the super reach effect is being executed, the hold display area 10SHH and the active display area 10SHA may not be displayed.

Furthermore, a pending number display area 10SHHS is provided at the left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the pending number display area 10SHHS, similarly to the pending display area 10SHH, the pending number of the variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the special figure game is displayed in a specifiable manner. The display mode is that of arithmetic numerals.

Then, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the line-of-sight guide effect four seconds before timing T4 during which the reach effect of super reach is being executed. The production control CPU 120 executes a production that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by using a visual production effect, for example, as a gaze guidance production.

In this example, the production control CPU 120 first displays a character image 10SHC imitating a character holding a hammer and a button image 10SHB imitating a push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 41-6(B). do.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 changes the mode of the character image 10SHC so that the character makes an action of raising a hammer, as shown in FIGS. 41-6(B) to 41-6(D). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 turns on the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R as shown in FIGS. Turn on the light so that the light spot moves from the inside to the outside.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 changes the aspect of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings down the hammer, as shown in FIGS. 41-7(E) and (F). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 turns on the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R, as shown in FIGS. Turn on the light so that the light spot moves from the outside to the inside.

After that, as shown in FIG. 41-7 (G), the performance control CPU 120 controls the hammer that the character has swung down to hit the button image 10SHB and the button image 10SHB to create a plurality of star-like shapes at timing T4. The appearance of various images is changed so that the "star" effect image 10SHS of the image is scattered. In addition, as shown in FIG. 41-7 (G), the performance control CPU 120 starts the vibration performance at timing T4, vibrates the push button 31B, and causes the push button 31B to vibrate. The game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned on.

Then, one second after timing T4, the performance control CPU 120 ends the eye-guide performance, as shown in FIG. 41-7 (H). After that, the performance control CPU 120 ends the vibration performance and stops the vibration of the push button 31B when the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance has elapsed, and the game effect lamp built in the push button 31B 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned off.

Here, the push button 31B is provided at a position away from the display screen of the image display device 5, such as below the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 41-1, for example. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player who is paying attention to the performance displayed on the image display device 5 to check the state of the push button 31B, and to check whether the push button 31B is vibrating or not, or whether the push button 31B is lit. It may be difficult to recognize whether or not the On the other hand, by performing a line-of-sight guidance effect on the screen of the image display device 5 before the vibration effect is executed, it is possible to draw attention to the push button 31B before the push button 31B vibrates. The vibration of the button 31B can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

It should be noted that the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is set lower than that of the constant small symbol and the display of the number of reservations. This priority setting can be realized by displaying the line-of-sight guiding effect on a layer on the back side of the layer that constantly displays the small symbols and the number of reservations among the plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in Figure 41-7 (G), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed on the back side of the small symbol always displayed in the small symbol display area 10SHK, creating an eye-guiding effect. It can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS that is displayed has a lower priority than the regular small symbol.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 41-7 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed on the back side of the pending number display displayed in the pending number display area 10SHHS, and the line of sight is It can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is the display of the guidance effect, has a lower priority than the display of the number of reservations.

On the other hand, the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is set higher than that of the pending display, active display, background image, and decorative pattern. This priority setting can be realized by displaying the line-of-sight guiding effect on a layer that is in front of a layer that displays a background image or a decorative pattern among a plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in Figures 41-6(B) to 41-7(G), the character image 10SHC and button image 10SHB are displayed in front of the "mountain scenery" background image 10SHY. It can be said that the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB, which are the display of the line-of-sight guiding effect, have a higher priority than the background image 10SHY of "mountain scenery".

Additionally, in this example, as shown in Figure 41-6(D), the hammer of the character image 10SHC is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R. It can be said that the character image 10SHC, which is the display of the line-of-sight guiding effect, has a higher priority than the "left" ready-to-reach decorative pattern 10SH5L and the "right" ready-to-reach decorative symbol 10SH5R.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 41-6(D), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R. Therefore, it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is the display of the eye-guiding effect, has a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 41-6 (G), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the hold display displayed in the hold display area 10SHH, and the eye guidance effect is It can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS that is displayed has a higher priority than the pending display.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 41-6 (G), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the active display displayed in the active display area 10SHA, and the eye-guiding effect is It can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS that is displayed has a higher priority than the active display.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guide performance is being performed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guide performance can be made conspicuous while ensuring the visibility of the small symbols and the pending number display at all times.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 41-6(B) to 41-7(G), when the eye-guiding effect is being executed, the display of the eye-guiding effect and the display of the eye-guiding effect are Also, small symbols and pending number display, which have high priority, are displayed brightly, and other displays are displayed darkly.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guide performance is being performed, it is possible to better ensure the visibility of the small design and the pending number display at all times, and to make the visibility of the line-of-sight guide performance more noticeable. .

(Modified example of characteristic part 10SH)
The invention related to the characteristic part 10SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

For example, in the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4 in FIG. 41-3, the determination ratio of whether or not to use the eye-guide effect may be set depending on which type of vibration effect is to be executed. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the current vibration performance is a vibration performance in which the push button 31B vibrates for 1.5 seconds and also causes the push button 31B to emit white light. Depending on whether it is a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits a red light, or a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in a rainbow color. The presence or absence of eye-guiding effects may be determined at different ratios. Here, when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits red light, it is easy to execute the gaze guiding effect. In addition, when a vibration effect is performed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors, the eye guidance effect is always performed. In other words, when the line-of-sight guidance performance is executed, the execution rate of the vibration performance with higher jackpot reliability is higher than when it is not performed. According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve expectations for the execution of the vibration effect with higher jackpot reliability.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to be able to execute a vibration performance that is linked to the preview performance. In this case, there are multiple types of vibration performances that are linked to the preview performance, depending on the combination of the linked preview performance, the vibration duration of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance, and the emitting color of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance. It may also be possible to perform a vibration effect. The effect control CPU 120 can execute an accessory preview effect that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display that is being executed, depending on the operation mode of the movable body 32. The performance control CPU 120 can execute a vibration performance that is linked to a highly reliable accessory preview performance. This vibration effect is an effect that causes the push button 31B to vibrate in synchronization with the operation of the movable body 32, and also causes the push button 31B to emit white light. In addition, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance in this case should just be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked accessory preview performance. According to such a configuration, the vibration performance can be used as a chance-up performance in the accessory preview performance.

Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 may be able to execute a vibration performance that is linked with other highly reliable preview performances. This vibration effect is an effect that causes the push button 31B to vibrate in synchronization with the image displayed in the preview effect, and also causes the push button 31B to emit white light. In addition, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance in this case should just be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked preview performance. According to such a configuration, the vibration performance can be a chance-up performance in the preview performance.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, after a determined decorative pattern that becomes a jackpot combination is derived, the game ball passes through a specific area provided in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a specific passing gate or winning hole. By doing so, a jackpot game state may be started. In that case, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a round lottery performance that notifies the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state when a game ball passing through a specific area is detected. The performance control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration performance that is linked to the round lottery performance. This vibration performance is a performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery performance, and is executed in the jackpot game state. Notify that the upper limit number of rounds to be played is not the minimum number of rounds among the multiple options. Alternatively, as a vibration effect, when the upper limit number of rounds is announced in the round lottery effect, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors. It may be definitely notified that the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the gaming state is the highest number of rounds among a plurality of options. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the vibration performance linked to the round lottery performance.

The performance control CPU 120 may be capable of executing error notification processing. In the error notification process, when an error command notifying that an error has occurred is received from the main board 11, or when an error is detected in the production control board 12, error notification corresponding to the error is executed. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 or a process of outputting an error notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. The performance control CPU 120 is capable of displaying an error notification image corresponding to an error on the image display device 5 while executing the line-of-sight guidance performance. In that case, the display of the line-of-sight guiding effect only needs to have a lower priority than the display of the error notification image. According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error notification image can be suitably ensured even if the line-of-sight guiding effect is executed when displaying the error notification image.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different between when the line-of-sight guide effect is executed and when the line-of-sight guide effect is not executed. For example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to be longer when the line-of-sight guide effect is executed than when the line-of-sight guide effect is not executed, the line-of-sight guide effect is executed and the vibration effect is executed. It can improve your interest when playing. Also, for example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is made longer when the line-of-sight guide effect is not executed than when the line-of-sight guide effect is executed, even if the line-of-sight guide effect is not executed. , it is easy to recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be set to a certain timing as a reference, and may be made different between a timing before the reference timing and a timing after the reference timing. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to 1.5 seconds at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, which is a timing before timing T2, based on timing T2 when reach is achieved. , timing T3 when normal reach reach effect is being executed and timing T4 when super reach reach effect is being executed, which is a timing later than timing T2, is 3 seconds. The vibration time at a timing after the reference timing may be longer than the vibration time at a timing before the reference timing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the vibration presentation is executed after the reference timing.

Depending on the strength of vibration of the push button 31B, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance may be different. For example, there are times when the push button 31B is vibrated at a first strength and times when it is vibrated at a second strength that is greater than the first strength, and the push button 31B is vibrated at the second strength. When vibrating the push button 31B at the first strength, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be higher than that when the push button 31B is vibrated at the first strength. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the intensity of vibration when the push button 31B vibrates.

The execution pattern of the vibration performance and the jackpot reliability may be the same between the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1 different from the first model. According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate variations in the execution patterns of the vibration performances and jackpot reliability that are respectively executed in the pachinko game machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko game machine 1 of the second model. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A vibration performance may be executed as a pre-read preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase opportunities to perform vibration effects.

In addition to this, when performing a vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration production as a pre-reading notice performance is different when the vibration mode is the first mode and when it is the second mode. , the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution that is the target of the pre-read notice may be different. For example, when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration production as a pre-read preview production is such that it vibrates continuously for a predetermined period of time, and when the vibration mode is such that the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined period of time, To make jackpot reliability different in a variable display before execution that is a target of a look-ahead notice. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance.

Alternatively, when performing a vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance, the execution timing of the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance may be set to multiple times that can execute the vibration performance as a preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed. It may be possible to execute only one of the timings. For example, the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance can be performed only at timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at a timing different from the timing at which the vibration effect as a pre-read notice can be executed, the vibration effect is executed as a preview effect to foretell the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed. It is possible to appropriately recognize that the execution has been carried out.

When performing a vibration performance as a preview performance at a timing when a vibration performance is possible as a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display that is being executed, the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display that is being executed is announced. The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a preview performance may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance. For example, if it is possible to execute a vibration effect as a preview effect at timing T1 when the variable display of decorative symbols is started, the push button 31B in the vibration effect as a preview effect to foretell the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed. The vibration time of the push button 31B is set to 3 seconds, and the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a preview preview performance is set to 1.5 seconds. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed is set to a mode in which it continues to vibrate for a predetermined period of time, and the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance The mode of vibration is such that the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off over a predetermined period of time. According to such a configuration, in the case where the vibration performance as a preview performance can be executed at the timing when the vibration performance as a preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed can be executed, either It is possible to easily recognize whether the vibration effect has been executed.

When the first model of pachinko game machine 1 and the second model of pachinko game machine 1 which is different from the first model have the same vibration performance execution pattern and jackpot reliability, the vibration effect is executed at a specific timing. Regarding the vibration effect, even if the mode of the vibration effect executed on the first model pachinko game machine 1 and the mode of the vibration effect executed on the second model pachinko game machine 1 are different, the jackpot cannot be won. The reliability may be the same. For example, regarding the vibration performance executed at timing T2 when reach is established, the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the specific performance executed in the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1 Even if the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance to be executed is different, the jackpot reliability is assumed to be 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the model of the pachinko game machine 1 is different, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at a specific timing.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be adjusted to match the image of the effect to be performed at that time, for example, if the eye-guide effect is not performed. For example, when executing a notification effect to notify that a reach has been achieved at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, the vibration effect is used to vibrate the push button 31B during a period in which the video of the notification effect is displayed. According to such a configuration, even when the line-of-sight guide performance is not performed, a sense of unity is created between the vibration performance and the performance being executed at that time, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

When the first model of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model of pachinko gaming machine 1 that is different from the first model have the same execution pattern and jackpot reliability, vibrations of the same execution pattern can be used. Regarding the production, only the lower limit value of the jackpot reliability may be guaranteed. According to such a configuration, for example, when a vibration performance is executed as a performance to increase the chance of another performance, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance can be flexibly determined in relation to the jackpot reliability of the other performance. While making adjustments, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be able to be performed at a timing different from timings T1 to T4. For example, after the variable display mode of the decorative symbols becomes a ready-to-win mode, the production control CPU 120 temporarily stops displaying the decorative symbols of a predetermined ready-to-win combination that is not a jackpot combination, and then temporarily stops displaying the decorative symbols of a predetermined ready-to-win combination that is not a jackpot combination. It is possible to perform an inciting performance that incites development into a reach mode. After the promotion effect is executed, there are cases in which the reach mode is developed with high reliability of jackpot, and cases where the display result becomes "miss" without developing into the reach mode with high reliability of jackpot. When developing into a ready-to-win mode with high jackpot reliability, the performance control CPU 120 executes a successful promotion performance that notifies the development to a ready-to-reach mode with high jackpot reliability as a result of the promotion performance. On the other hand, if the display result is "miss" without developing into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability, the performance control CPU 120 notifies that the reach mode with high jackpot reliability will not develop as a result of the promotion performance. Execute the inciting failure performance. In executing such an inciting effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at the timing of executing the inciting success effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the successful inciting performance is performed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance that can be executed at the timing of executing the successful stimulation performance may be adjusted to match the image of the successful stimulation performance. According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest when the successful inciting effect is performed.

The emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration performance that can be executed at the timing of executing the inciting success performance is the vibration of the execution pattern with the lowest jackpot reliability among the vibration performances of multiple types of execution patterns that can be executed at other timings. The push button 31B in the presentation may have the same luminescent color as the luminescent color. According to such a configuration, when a successful inciting performance is executed, there is a possibility that the display result will be a "miss" even if the reach mode develops into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability. It is possible to prevent it from increasing.

In addition, when the display result is a "jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 can execute the vibration performance at the timing immediately before stopping and displaying the fixed decorative pattern that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern. According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to improve the interest at the timing immediately before the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, but also to increase expectations for the vibration performance itself, and to prevent the vibration performance from being performed at other timings as well. It can improve your interest when playing.

When the first model of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model of pachinko gaming machine 1 different from the first model have the same vibration performance execution pattern and jackpot reliability, the advantage to the player is Even in the case of a "jackpot" of a jackpot type different from the jackpot type with the highest advantage among multiple types of jackpot types with different numbers, the emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration production can be "rainbow color". do. According to such a configuration, when the emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect becomes "rainbow color", it is possible to avoid giving the misunderstanding that it is a "jackpot" of the jackpot type with the highest advantage. It can be done.

If there are only two types of advantages for the player depending on the jackpot type, an execution pattern in which the emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration performance is "rainbow color" may not be provided. According to such a configuration, even though the push button 31B emits light in a "rainbow color" in the vibration performance, it is possible to prevent a "jackpot" of a jackpot type that has a low advantage to the player, It is possible to prevent expectations for the vibration performance from being lost.

The performance control CPU 120 may guide the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by using an auditory performance effect as a gaze guidance performance. For example, the production control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound effect when a vibration production is being performed, and then gradually increases the volume of the specific sound effect from a low volume to a high volume as a line-of-sight guidance production. Output as it changes. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the attention of a player who has difficulty recognizing the line-of-sight guiding performance using visual performance effects to the operating means before the operating means vibrates.

If the configuration is such that the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the setting value, even if the vibration performance has the same execution pattern, the first setting value and the second setting value different from the first setting value may be used. The jackpot reliability of the vibration performance of the execution pattern may be different depending on the time. For example, even if the vibration effect has the same execution pattern, when the setting value is "6", the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of that execution pattern may be higher than when the setting value is "1". . According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed and the display result is a "jackpot", it is possible to increase expectations that the set value is highly advantageous.

In the case where the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the set value, the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be changed depending on the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value. The vibration time and emitted light color may be different. According to such a configuration, the set value can be suggested by the vibration effect. For example, when the setting value is any one of "1" to "3", and when the setting value is any one of "4" to "6", the push button 31B in the vibration effect is It is sufficient if the vibration time and emitted light color are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest by the vibration effect whether or not the high setting is likely to be the setting value "6" which is most advantageous for the player. Further, for example, the vibration time and emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest by the vibration effect whether or not the set value is an even number, which may be the set value "6" that is most advantageous to the player.

At timing T2 when reach is achieved, the push button 31B vibrates for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light, and the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B lights up in red. It may also be possible to perform a vibration effect in which the light is emitted. According to such a configuration, even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, it is possible to draw attention not only to the execution of the vibration effect but also to the manner in which the vibration effect is executed.

At timing T2 when reach is achieved, the push button 31B vibrates for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light, and the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B lights up in red. If it is possible to perform a vibration effect in which the light is emitted, the vibration effect is executed at both timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and timing T2 when reach is established. There may be cases where In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors is not executed at either timing T1 or timing T2, the vibration at timing T1 is not executed. The combination of the performance execution pattern and the vibration performance execution pattern at timing T2 may be a specific combination to definitively notify that the display result will be a "jackpot". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors. Even if the vibration effect is not executed, it is possible not only to increase expectations for the vibration effect to be executed at timing T2 when reach is established, but also to further increase attention to the aspect of the vibration effect at timing T2. .

The vibration effect may be executed at either timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed and timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed. In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in a rainbow color is not executed at either timing T3 or timing T4, the vibration at timing T3 is not executed. The combination of the performance execution pattern and the vibration performance execution pattern at timing T4 may be a specific combination to definitively notify that the display result will be a "jackpot". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 while the normal reach effect is being executed, the vibration effect causes the push button 31B to vibrate for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit rainbow-colored light. Even if the effect is not executed, it is possible to not only increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at timing T4 when the super reach reach effect is being executed, but also to draw more attention to the aspect of the vibration effect at timing T4. can be increased.

The vibration duration and vibration mode of the push button 31B in a vibration presentation that definitively notifies that the display result is a "jackpot" is different from a vibration presentation that does not definitively notify that the display result is a "jackpot." The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B may be different from those shown in FIG. For example, the vibration duration of the push button 31B in a vibration presentation that definitively notifies that the display result is a "jackpot" is different from the vibration duration of the push button 31B in a vibration presentation that does not definitively notify that the display result is a "jackpot." The vibration time is longer than the vibration time of the push button 31B. Alternatively, in a vibration presentation that does not definitively notify that the display result is a "jackpot," the vibration mode of the push button 31B is monotonous, but it definitely reports that the display result is a "jackpot." In the vibration effect, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with a predetermined beat. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the vibration performance that definitively notifies the player that the display result is a "jackpot" is a special vibration performance.

When the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed or at timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect may be always executed. According to such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means is suitably recognized, thereby suitably increasing the expectation that the display result will be a "jackpot" due to the execution of the reach effect. be able to.

When performing a vibration effect at either timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started or timing T2 when a reach is achieved, a timing T3 when the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed; The vibration effect may be made possible to be performed at any one of the timing T4 and the time when the super reach effect is being executed. In that case, the vibration time and emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effects executed at timing T3 and timing T4 are lower than the vibration time and emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effects executed at timing T1 and timing T2. In other words, the timing T3 is set so that the jackpot reliability of the vibration effects executed at timing T3 and timing T4 does not fall below the jackpot reliability of the vibration effects executed at timing T1 and timing T2. Alternatively, the execution pattern of the vibration effect that can be executed at timing T4 may be limited. For example, when the vibration effect of execution pattern SE2 is executed at timing T1, the vibration effect of execution pattern SE5 is executed at timing T3, and the vibration effect of execution pattern SE8 is executed at timing T4; limit. According to such a configuration, when the vibration performance is executed a plurality of times in one variable display, it is possible to prevent the credibility of the jackpot reliability from being lowered.

When it is possible to perform a vibration performance that is linked to a preview performance, the mode of the vibration performance that is linked to the preview performance may be different from the mode of the vibration performance that is not linked to the preview performance. For example, in a vibration performance linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with the beat of the music played in the linked preview performance. Further, for example, in a vibration performance linked to the accessory preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with the sound effect when the accessory moves. Further, for example, in a vibration performance linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is caused to emit light in a color different from that of the push button 31B in a vibration performance not linked to a preview performance. According to such a configuration, when a vibration performance is executed, it is possible to easily recognize whether the vibration performance is linked to a preview performance or not linked to a preview performance. .

It may also be possible to perform a present box effect. In that case, when the present box is opened, a character holding a hammer as shown in FIG. 41-6(B) may jump out of the opened present box, and a line-of-sight guiding effect may be performed. According to such a configuration, since the present box effect is executed, it is possible to increase expectations for the execution of the line-of-sight guidance effect and the vibration effect.

When it is possible to perform an operation effect that causes the push button 31B to be operated, in this operation effect, in order to notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid during the operation validity period in which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, The push button 31B may be turned on. In that case, the push button 31B is lit in a manner different from the manner in which the push button 31B is lit in the vibration effect. For example, when lighting the push button 31B for a vibration effect, the control may be such that the push button 31B emits red light continuously for 3 seconds while the push button 31B vibrates, resulting in a lighting mode for the vibration effect. . On the other hand, when lighting the push button 31B in the operation performance, the button operation switches the push button 31B between red light emission (lighting up) and non-light emission (lighting out) every 150 milliseconds during the operation validity period. It may be controlled to have a lighting mode for suggestion. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid. Note that during the valid lever operation period in which the operation of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A is valid, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A may be turned on to notify that the operation of the operation lever is valid. In this case, control may be performed so that the operating lever of the stick controller 31A emits light during the valid lever operation period to provide a lighting mode for suggesting a lever operation. The lighting mode for suggesting a lever operation may be the same lighting mode as the lighting mode for suggesting a button operation, or may be a lighting mode different from the lighting mode for suggesting a button operation.

For example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B or the like can be operated by the player to, for example, set the volume of the effect to be executed, set the type of music and background to be output, and display images. Settings related to effects, such as the brightness setting of the device 5 and the brightness settings of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9, may be changeable. Note that, for example, it may be possible to select which production setting to change from the menu screen, or a different operation may be performed depending on the change item desired by the player, and the setting corresponding to that operation may be changed. You can do it like this. Further, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B may be turned on in order to notify that the settings related to the performance can be changed. In that case, the push button 31B is lit in a different manner from the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration production and the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the operation production. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably notify that the settings regarding the performance can be changed.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 10SH)
In relation to the characteristic portion 10SH, a gaming machine has been proposed that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and can execute a vibration effect in which an operating means that can be operated by the player vibrates (for example, (See Publication No. 2019-051075).

Generally, a player plays a game while viewing a display means on which a variable display or various effects are displayed. Therefore, if the operating means is not within the player's field of vision, even if a vibration effect is executed, the player may not be able to recognize that the operating means is vibrating. In that case, it is not possible to sufficiently increase the interest through vibration effects.

Therefore, in order to attract attention to the gaming means before the vibration performance is executed and to sufficiently increase the interest of the vibration performance, the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature section 10SH is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. A machine (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player), and an operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player). includes a push button 31B that can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button, etc.), and a vibration performance execution means that can perform a vibration performance in which the operating means vibrates (for example, the performance control CPU 120 includes a push button 31B (e.g., the CPU 120 for controlling the effect is capable of executing a vibrating effect in which the player vibrates), a line-of-sight guiding effect executing means capable of executing a line-of-sight guiding effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operating means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (e.g., it is possible to execute a line-of-sight guide effect that guides the line of sight to the push button 31B), and the control is controlled to be in the advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. (For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed.), and the vibration effect execution means is , the vibration effect can be executed at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started). , timing T2 when reach is established, timing T3 after timing T1 and timing T2 when normal reach reach effect is being executed, and timing when super reach reach effect is being executed. T4, etc.), the vibration effect can be performed in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. can be executed (for example, the production control CPU 120 can perform the following regardless of whether it is at any one of timing T1 and timing T2, or at any one of timing T3 and timing T4). (first, the vibration effect can be executed in a manner in which the vibration time of the push button 31B and the emitted light color are the same); For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the eye-gaze guidance performance before the vibration performance is executed at the second timing (such as not executing the gaze-guidance performance at timing T1 and timing T2, etc.). , the performance control CPU 120 is characterized by being able to execute the line-of-sight guidance performance before the vibration performance is executed at timing T3 and timing T4, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the operating means before the vibration performance is executed, and to sufficiently increase the interest of the vibration performance.

In the gaming machine of the means 2 according to the feature part 10SH, in the gaming machine of the means 1, the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect when the line of sight guidance effect is being executed (for example, the effect control The CPU 120 may be configured to be able to perform a vibration effect while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, a sense of unity is created between the vibration performance and the line-of-sight guidance performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means 1 or 2, the gaming machine of the means 3 related to the feature part 10SH has a specific performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 , a super reach reach effect, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (For example, it is possible to perform a vibration effect while a super reach effect is being executed).

According to such a configuration, since the vibration effect may be executed when the specific effect is being executed, it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic part 10SH is a display means for displaying in any of the gaming machines of the means 1 to 3 (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an image display device 5 for displaying various effect images). ), and the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information, and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information (for example, the display of the line-of-sight guide effect has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information). may have a lower priority than a small symbol, a pending number display, and various error notifications, and a higher priority than a pending display, an active display, a background image, a decorative symbol, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being performed, it is possible to suitably ensure the visibility of the predetermined information while making the visibility of the line-of-sight guide effect noticeable.

The gaming machine of the means 5 according to the characteristic part 10SH is the gaming machine of any one of the means 1 to 4, in which the vibration performance execution means executes the vibration performance of the first aspect and the advantageous state than the first aspect. (For example, the performance control CPU 120 causes the push button 31B to vibrate for 1.5 seconds and It is possible to perform a vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits white light, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit red light. When a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits red light than when a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits red light is executed. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect of the second aspect is easier to execute than the vibration effect of the first aspect (for example, the vibration effect of the second aspect is more likely to be performed in a pachinko game). In machine 1, when the line-of-sight guiding effect is executed, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds rather than the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted white light. At the same time, a vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits red light is easier to perform, etc.).

According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve expectations for the execution of the vibration effect of the second aspect.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion 10SH may be combined with a part or all of the configurations related to other characteristic portions as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of the configurations of other features as appropriate.

(Explanation of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
FIG. 42-1 shows an example of the configuration of the effect device regarding the feature parts 48AK to 50AK. In this configuration example, a movable body 32 for performance serving as a movable performance device is provided at the front of the lower end, which is the lower edge on the front side that overlaps with the display screen of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 may be connected to an operating motor via, for example, a link mechanism. The movable body 32 can be changed between an initial position and a position different from the initial position on the front side of the image display device 5 by transmitting power from the operating motor. The movable body 32 may be able to change its position by, for example, power from an operating solenoid or other general actuator.

The movable body 32 includes a frame portion and a window portion. The frame portion of the movable body 32 is constructed using a decorative member, and has a structure that can be covered so that the display screen of the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by the player. The window portion of the movable body 32 is formed using transparent glass or synthetic resin, or is formed as a simple opening, and has a transparent configuration so that the player can visually check the display screen of the image display device 5. ing.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs forming the upper frame lamp 9C, a plurality of LEDs forming the left frame lamp 9M, and a plurality of LEDs forming the right frame lamp 9N. The upper frame lamp 9C is provided at a predetermined position above the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The left frame lamp 9M is provided at a predetermined position on the left side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The right frame lamp 9N is provided at a predetermined position on the right side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs forming the lever lamp 9B1 and a plurality of LEDs forming the button lamp 9B2. The lever lamp 9B1 is composed of a plurality of LEDs built into the operation rod (operation lever) of the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9B2 is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided inside the push button 31B. The operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be partially or entirely formed of a translucent member. Thereby, by lighting the lever lamp 9B1, it is possible to cause the operating lever of the stick controller 31A to emit light. Further, by lighting the button lamp 9B2, the push button 31B can be caused to emit light.

For example, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are integrally formed, and the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are configured to vibrate when driven by the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be provided inside or near the push button 31B, built into the operating lever of the stick controller 31A, or provided at the base of the operating lever. In order to diversify the vibration modes of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate and an operation part performance including a light emission performance accompanied by a vibration performance can be executed as a suggestion performance suggesting that the control is to be controlled to a jackpot game state. In the vibration performance included in the operation section performance, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in a vibration mode according to the vibration pattern by driving the vibration motor 131. In the light emission effect included in the operation section effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are turned on to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light along with the vibration effect. In addition, in the light emission effect included in the operation section effect, by lighting one of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, one of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is caused to emit light in conjunction with the vibration effect. Good too. For example, by lighting only the button lamp 9B2, only the push button 31B may be caused to emit light in conjunction with the vibration effect.

FIG. 42-2(A) shows a setting example of an operation section presentation pattern used to execute an operation section presentation. In this setting example, as a plurality of operation section performance patterns, operation section performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03, AKC11 to ACK13, AKC21, AKC22, AKC31, AKC32, and AKC41 are prepared in advance. Light emitting color, vibration pattern, jackpot reliability, and purpose are set corresponding to each operating part performance pattern. The light emission color corresponding to the operation section performance pattern indicates the light emission mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in the light emission performance included in the operation section performance. The vibration pattern corresponding to the operation section performance pattern shows the vibration mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in the vibration performance included in the operation section performance. The jackpot reliability corresponding to the operation section performance pattern indicates the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled when the operation section performance according to the operation section performance pattern is executed. The usage corresponding to the operation section performance pattern indicates the timing at which the operation section performance is executed for each operation section performance pattern.

The operation section performance can be executed at a plurality of timings as the variable display progresses, for example, at the start of preliminary variation, at the start of target variation, at the time of establishing a reach, at the time of development of a reach, and at the time of triggering a win/fail notification. The pre-variation start time is a timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation section performance. The start of the target variation is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is the target of suggestion by the operation section performance. When the reach is established, the timing corresponds to the case where the variable display becomes the reach mode. When the reach is developed, the timing corresponds to the case where the development performance is executed in conjunction with the reach performance of the super reach. The development performance is a performance that notifies that the super reach performance will be executed after the normal reach performance is executed (reach development). The win/fail notification inciting time is the timing that corresponds to the inciting performance before the win/fail notification performance that notifies whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" while executing the super reach reach effect.

In the setting example shown in FIG. 42-2(A), a plurality of operation section effect patterns that can be used to execute operation section effects according to a plurality of timings are prepared in advance. Further, it is set so that different operation section performance patterns can be used depending on a plurality of timings at which the operation section performance can be executed.

When the reach effect of super reach is executed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when only the reach effect of normal reach is executed and the reach effect of super reach is not executed. It is possible to notify whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled depending on whether or not the reach performance of super reach is executed and the determined decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is derived. For the super reach effect, for example, a plurality of reach effects including SP reach A may be prepared in advance. Each reach performance may include performances that have different performance modes from each other. Each reach performance may include a performance with a common performance mode. In order to have jackpot reliability according to each reach effect, the determination ratio when the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the determination ratio when the variable display result is not a "jackpot" must be set. Bye. Depending on the fluctuation pattern determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern determination table using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern, the presence or absence of a reach effect, the presence or absence of a super reach effect, the presentation mode of the reach effect, etc. It would be nice if it were configurable.

The operation section performance is executed at a predetermined rate depending on whether or not the variable display result becomes a "jackpot", regardless of specific performances that can be executed according to the progress of the game, including variable displays, such as reach performances, for example. It is possible to determine the presence or absence of Such an operation part performance that can be executed regardless of the specific performance is also referred to as a single operation part performance. On the other hand, in some cases, a performance is performed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light or vibrate in accordance with a specific performance. A performance using light emission or vibration that accompanies such a specific performance is also referred to as a specific interlocking performance.

FIG. 42-2(B) shows a setting example when executing a specific linked effect. In this setting example, when executing a specific interlocking effect in conjunction with multiple specific effects, such as moving body movement, image display, music playback in the reach effect of SP Reach A, or jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2, etc. Emission color and vibration pattern are set. The light emitting color in the specific interlocking performance is set in accordance with the content of the specific performance, and it is only necessary that the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be made to emit light as part of the specific performance. The vibration pattern in the specific interlocking performance is set in accordance with the content of the specific performance, and it is sufficient that the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be vibrated as part of the specific performance. In this way, since the specific interlocking performance can be executed as part of the specific performance, the jackpot reliability is the same as the specific performance, and a unique jackpot reliability is not set. The vibrations of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the specific interlocking performance are included in the special vibration performance that can be executed along with the execution of the specific performance. The light emission of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the specific interlocking effect is included in the specific light emission effect that can be executed along with the execution of the specific effect.

The reach performance of SP reach A only needs to have a jackpot reliability of about 40%, for example. The jackpot type lottery CH1 may be any lottery effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is different from the first jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the minimum (for example, 4 rounds). The jackpot type lottery CH2 may be any lottery effect that can be executed when the second jackpot type has the maximum number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds). Incidentally, the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 may be a lottery performance regarding the jackpot type according to the presence or absence of time saving control or probability change control after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the termination conditions, or may be a drawing performance regarding the jackpot type that was announced earlier in the jackpot gaming state. It may be a lottery effect regarding whether or not there is a rank increase and the amount of increase resulting in the number of rounds being increased from the number of rounds. As jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2, based on the game ball that entered the V-winning hole in the V-winning attacker, if it is possible to control the probability variable state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, whether or not the V-winning attacker is opened or not and the opening time , the number of openings, or the termination condition of probability variable control, it may be possible to execute a lottery effect regarding jackpot game states with different advantages. Based on the occurrence of a V winning due to the game ball entering the V winning attacker, when it is possible to control from a small winning gaming state to a jackpot gaming state, whether or not the V winning winning attacker is released, the opening time, the number of openings, or, Depending on the number of rounds of the jackpot gaming state that is controlled after the occurrence of a V winning prize, it may be possible to execute a lottery performance regarding a small winning gaming state or a jackpot gaming state with different degrees of advantage.

Until the game state in which the V-winning attacker can be released is started, it is controlled to a weak vibration monitoring state, and after that, from the start of the gaming state in which the V-winning attacker can be released, the V is caused by the game ball entering the V-winning attacker. During the period until the winning occurs, the controller may be controlled to a strong vibration monitoring state, and the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled not to vibrate. When a V winning prize occurs, the control is performed to a weak vibration monitoring state, and an effect including vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be executed. The strong vibration monitoring state is a state in which it is easy to detect vibration errors, and the weak vibration monitoring state is a state in which it is difficult to detect vibration errors than the strong vibration monitoring state. Control is performed to a strong vibration monitoring state during a period when there is a high risk of fraud due to the player generating vibrations. On the other hand, during a period in which there is little risk of fraud due to the player generating vibrations, the vibration weak monitoring state is controlled. When a vibration error is detected, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of an alarm image, output of an alarm sound, lighting of an alarm lamp, output of an alarm signal, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient if the control to notify the occurrence of an abnormality is executable. If a vibration error is detected, the pachinko game machine 1 may be brought to a game stop state by the control of the CPU 103 in the game control microcomputer 100 or the like. As a result, it is possible to appropriately monitor vibrations and to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to notification of a vibration error or game stoppage due to inappropriate abnormality determination.

FIG. 42-3 shows the settings of the vibration pattern. A plurality of vibration patterns are prepared in advance depending on the vibration mode of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. FIG. 42-3(A) shows vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, AKV11, AKV12, AKV21, AKV22, and AKV31 used to execute the vibration effects included in the operation section effects. FIG. 42-3(B) shows vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 used to execute the special vibration performance included in the specific interlocking performance.

The vibration pattern AKV01 has a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV01 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV01 is not included in the operation section performance that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the preliminary fluctuation. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC01, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is white.

In the vibration pattern AKV02, the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance patterns AKC02 and AKC03 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. Further, the vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV02 is not included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the preliminary variation or the start of the target variation. In the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC02, the light emitting color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes red. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC03, the emitted light color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in accordance with the vibration performance becomes a rainbow color. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC11, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is white.

In the vibration pattern AKV03, the on-period continues for 3000 milliseconds. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance patterns AKC12 and AKC13 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the operation section performance using the vibration pattern AKV03 is not included in the operation section performance that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the target variation. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC12, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes red. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC13, the emitted light color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in accordance with the vibration performance becomes a rainbow color.

The vibration pattern AKV11 has an on-period vibration mode that matches the effect AKR1 when a reach is established. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV11 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 that can be executed when a reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV11 is not included in the operation section performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is established. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC21, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes pink.

The vibration pattern AKV12 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKR2 when a reach is established. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV12 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC22 that can be executed when a reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV12 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is established. In the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC22, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes orange.

Note that as the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance when a reach is established, a performance based on a vibration pattern that is common to the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is established may be performed. For example, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 that can be executed when a reach is established, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executable. Further, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC22 that can be executed when a reach is established, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 may be executable. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation part effect executed when the reach is established and the operation part effect executed at the start of the preliminary variation or the start of the target variation. . In this way, even when the timings for executing the operation section effects are different, by making the vibration modes of the vibration effects common, it may be possible to prevent an increase in the control burden and control data for the effects.

The vibration pattern AKV21 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKS1 when the reach develops. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV21 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV21 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is developed. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC31, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in accordance with the vibration performance is white.

The vibration pattern AKV22 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKS2 at the time of reach development. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV22 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC32 that can be executed when the reach is developed. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV22 is not included in the operation section performance that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is developed. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC32, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is white.

Note that as the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance when the reach is developed, a performance using a vibration pattern that is common to the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is developed may be executed. For example, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executable. Further, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 may be executable. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation part effect executed at the time of reach development and the operation part effect executed at the start of pre-variation or target variation. . In this way, even when the timings for executing the operation section effects are different, by making the vibration modes of the vibration effects common, it may be possible to prevent an increase in the control burden and control data for the effects.

In the vibration pattern AKV31, the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds or more. For example, after the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds, the on-period continues further until the player's action of operating the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the valid detection period. I wish I could. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV31 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC41 that can be executed when inciting the success or failure notification. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV31 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from the time when the success/failure notification is triggered. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC41, the light emitting color in the light emission performance in which the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is gold.

In addition, when a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV31 is executed, whether or not to provide an effective detection period may be changed depending on the type of effect executed in conjunction with the variable display, such as the type of reach effect. good. If a valid detection period is provided, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A should be set to have a light emission mode that switches between golden light (lights on) and non-lights (lights off) every 150 milliseconds to suggest an operation. May be controlled. In addition, when the effective detection period is not provided, control may be performed so that the light emitting mode for the vibration effect is such that the control lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emits gold light continuously over the period of vibration. On the other hand, if a valid detection period is provided, it is suggested that the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A be switched every 150 milliseconds between emitting red light (lit) and non-emitting light (lighting out) in a red color different from gold. It may be controlled to have a desired light emitting mode. By executing a light emission effect with a light emission mode that switches between light emission and non-light emission every 150 milliseconds, it can be confirmed that the operation of operating the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is effective while executing the vibration effect. , can be suggested to the player. Alternatively, a plurality of lamp layers for which lamp control data can be set may be used to give different priorities for light emission control. For example, the first lamp layer has a light emission mode that switches the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A between red light emission (on) and non-light emission (lights out) every 150 milliseconds as a light emission mode for normal operation suggestion. Set the lamp control data. The second lamp layer is set with lamp control data that causes the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to continuously emit gold light over an effective detection period of 5000 milliseconds as a light emission mode for suggesting special operations. do. Then, the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data set in the second lamp layer is controlled more than the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data set in the first lamp layer. Execute with priority. As a result, the light emitting mode for suggesting a special operation may be controlled to be preferentially used as the light emitting mode for the light emitting effect than the light emitting mode for suggesting a normal operation.

The plurality of reach performances that become super reach may include a strong SP reach with relatively high jackpot reliability and a weak SP reach with relatively low jackpot reliability. In the strong SP reach performance, a win/fail notification performance is executed after a motion detection performance is executed by detecting a player's motion that is an operation on the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When a vibration effect corresponding to such a reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the vibration effect is turned on until the player's movement that is an operation on the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the effective detection period. It is sufficient if the vibration mode continues for a period of time. In the weak SP reach performance, a win/fail notification performance is performed without performing a motion detection performance. When a vibration performance corresponding to such a weak SP reach performance is executed, the vibration pattern AKV31 may be activated at least 1500 milliseconds before the win/fail notification performance. Note that a case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration performance is different between the operation section performance when the strong SP reach performance is executed and the operation performance when the weak SP reach performance is executed. For example, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when a strong SP reach effect is executed, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated continuously for 5000 milliseconds, which is the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be controlled to have a period. Alternatively, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the strong SP reach effect is executed, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be turned on to vibrate every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be controlled to be switched between a period and an off period in which vibration is not performed. On the other hand, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, it is an on period in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated for 2000 milliseconds. It may also be controlled in a vibration manner. A case may be provided in which the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation part effect when the strong SP reach effect is executed and the operation effect when the weak SP reach effect is executed. For example, as a light emitting effect included in the operation part effect when a strong SP reach effect is executed, the control lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A will be activated to emit a golden light every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. The light emitting mode may be controlled to switch between (lighting up) and non-lighting (lighting out). On the other hand, as a light emitting effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, the stick controller 31A is continuously activated for 2000 milliseconds by vibrating the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. The operating lever or push button 31B may be controlled to emit a golden light.

The vibration pattern AKV41 has a vibration mode during the on period that is linked to the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV42 has a vibration mode during the on period that is linked to the screen display in the SP reach A reach effect. The vibration pattern AKV43 has a vibration mode during the on period that is linked to music playback in the SP reach A reach performance. The vibration pattern AKV44 has a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds or more.

The vibration caused by the vibration pattern AKV41 becomes a special vibration performance included in a specific interlocking performance that is executed together with the movable body movement in the reach performance of SP reach A. In the specific interlocking performance executed together with the movable body movement in the reach performance of SP reach A, the light emitting color in the specific light emission performance becomes blue as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. The vibration caused by the vibration pattern AKV42 becomes a special vibration performance included in a specific interlocking performance that is executed together with the image display in the SP reach-A reach performance. In the specific interlocking performance that is executed together with the image display in the SP reach A reach performance, the light emitting color in the specific light emission performance becomes gold as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. The vibration caused by the vibration pattern AKV43 becomes a special vibration performance included in a specific interlocking performance that is executed together with music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the specific interlocking performance executed together with music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A, the light emitting color in the specific light emission performance changes from blue to red to gold as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate.

The vibration by vibration pattern AKV44 may be a special vibration effect included in a specific interlocking effect executed together with jackpot confirmation notification, or a special vibration effect included in a specific interlocking effect executed together with jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2. There are cases where this happens. In the specific interlocking performance that is executed together with the jackpot confirmation notification, the emitted light color in the specific light emission performance becomes a rainbow color as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1, the light emitting color in the specific light emitting effect becomes white as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH2, the emitted light color in the specific light emitting effect becomes a rainbow color as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate.

FIG. 42-4 shows an example of performing an effect by causing the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. Here, a plurality of performance execution examples AKA01 to AKA07 are shown depending on the emitted light color of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. In addition, the lever lamp 9B1 provided on the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the button lamp 9B2 provided on the push button 31B have a normal emission brightness set to a low level in the normal emission state, and the emission color is set to a low level. It is sufficient if the light is emitted in a white manner. Alternatively, in the normal light emitting state, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be set to a non-emitting state in which they do not emit light.

A production execution example AKA01 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit white light. When executing the operation section performance using any of the operation section performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32, the emitted light color becomes white. The operation section performance pattern AKC01 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of advance variation. The operation section performance pattern AKC11 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of target variation. Both of the operation section performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of reach development. The operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 all have jackpot reliability of 50% or more. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC01 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV01. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC11 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC31 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV21. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC32 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV22. Also when executing the jackpot type lottery CH1 as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes white.

A production execution example AKA02 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit red light. When executing the operation section effect using either the operation section effect pattern AKC02 or AKC12, the emitted light color becomes red. The operation section performance pattern AKC02 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of advance variation. The operation section performance pattern AKC12 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of target variation. The jackpot reliability of both the operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC02 and AKC12 is 70% or more. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC02 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation section effect based on the operation section pattern AKC12 includes a vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when playing the music of SP Reach A as a specific performance, a performance period in which the emitted light color becomes red is included.

A production execution example AKA03 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit rainbow-colored light. When performing the operation section performance using either of the operation section performance patterns AKC03 and AKC13, the emitted light color becomes rainbow-colored. The operation section performance pattern AKC03 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of advance variation. The operation section performance pattern AKC13 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of target variation. The reliability of the jackpot is 100% for both the operation section performances using the operation section performance patterns AKC03 and AKC13. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC03 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC13 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when a jackpot confirmation notification or a jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes rainbow-colored.

A production execution example AKA04 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit pink light. When executing the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC21, the emitted light color becomes pink. The operation section performance pattern AKC21 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of reach development. The operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC21 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC21 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV11.

Effect execution example AKA05 is a case where a light emission effect is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit orange light. When executing the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC22, the emitted light color becomes orange. The operation section performance pattern AKC22 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of reach development. The operation part performance based on the operation part performance pattern AKC22 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC22 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV12.

Effect execution example AKV06 is a case where a light emission effect is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit blue light. When executing the operation section effect, the emitted light color does not change to blue. When executing the movable body movement of SP Reach A as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes blue. Furthermore, when playing the music of SP Reach A as a specific performance, a performance period in which the emitted light color becomes blue is included.

Effect execution example AKV07 is a case where a light emission effect is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit gold light. When executing the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC41, the emitted light color becomes gold. The operation section performance pattern AKC41 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of notification of success or failure. The operation part performance based on the operation part performance pattern AKC41 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC41 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV31. When displaying an image of SP reach A as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes gold. Also, when playing the music of SP Reach A as a specific performance, a performance period in which the emitted light color becomes gold is included.

In this way, the emitted light colors of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be different or the same depending on the execution timing of the operation section performance, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration mode in the vibration performance. In addition to the luminous color, arbitrary luminous modes such as luminous time, luminous number (blinking number), luminous cycle (flashing cycle), and luminous brightness can also be determined by the execution timing of the operation section performance, jackpot reliability, and vibration in the vibration performance. Depending on the aspect, they may be different or common.

When executed at the start of advance variation, the operation section performance can be executed as a pre-read preview performance or a continuous preview performance. The pre-read preview performance suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion. The continuous preview performance continuously suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" over a plurality of variable displays executed before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion. The continuous preview performance can be executed using continuous performance patterns for each number of pending memories. The number of reserved memories here may be the number of special symbols reserved at the time of starting winnings. As a continuous performance pattern for each number of pending memories, a plurality of continuous performance patterns are prepared in advance according to the performance mode for each remaining number of times. The remaining number of times is set to the number of reserved special symbols stored at the time of starting winning, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display is executed. Then, when the variable display to be suggested is executed, the remaining number of times becomes "0".

FIG. 42-5 shows an example of setting a continuous effect pattern used to execute continuous preview effects. For the continuous performance pattern, for example, using a random value for determining the continuous performance pattern, refer to the continuous performance pattern determination table according to the number of reserved memories, and depending on the winning determination result, a determined value that matches the random value is assigned. The decision may be made by determining the decision result that has been determined.

FIG. 42-5(A) shows continuous effect patterns AKD01 to AKD06 that can be used when the number of pending memories is "2". In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD01, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC11 is executed. The part performance is performed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD02, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC12 is executed. The part performance is performed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD03, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC12 is executed. The part performance is performed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD04, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC13 is executed. The part performance is performed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD05, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC13 is executed. The part performance is performed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD06, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC13 is executed. The part performance is performed.

FIG. 42-5(B) shows continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16 that can be used when the number of pending memories is "3". In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance patterns AKD11 to AKD16, when the remaining number of times is "2" or "1", the operation section performance according to any of the continuous performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is "0". When this is the case, the operation section performance according to any one of the continuous performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 42-5(C) shows continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26 that can be used when the number of pending memories is "4". In the continuous preview performance using continuous performance patterns AKD21 to AKD26, when the remaining number of times is one of "1" to "3", the operation section performance according to any of the continuous performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is one of "1" to "3". When the value is "0", the operation section performance according to any one of the continuous performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 42-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process that can be executed in step S161 of FIG. 39 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the pre-read notice setting process shown in FIG. 42-6, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the pre-read notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101). The pre-read notice condition may be set in advance as a condition that enables execution of the pre-read notice performance which is a continuous notice performance. In step AKS101, it is determined whether or not the production control command (starting opening winning designation command, pending storage number notification command, winning determination result command) transmitted at the time of starting winning is received. If no command is received, it is determined that the prefetch notice condition is not satisfied. When a command is received, the content of the notification based on the received command is specified, and the winning determination result is specified as the notification content based on the winning determination result command, for example.

The winning determination result uses the gaming random numbers extracted at the start of winning to determine whether the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" or whether the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a specific fluctuation pattern. , the result determined by the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process may be used. The winning determination result may indicate, for example, any one of the following: jackpot, super reach confirmed in case of loss, reach confirmed in case of loss, and general in case of loss. The jackpot winning determination result corresponds to the case where the random number value for determining the display result is within the jackpot determination range, and corresponds to the case where the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The determination result at the time of winning when the super reach is confirmed in the event of a loss is included in the determination result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled by the jackpot gaming state, and it corresponds to the case where the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the confirmed super reach in the event of a loss. This is the judgment result. The determination result at the time of winning when the reach at the time of loss is confirmed is included in the determination result corresponding to the case where the jackpot gaming state is not controlled, and the determination result corresponding to the case where the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach determined range at the time of loss. It is. In the case of a loss, the general winning judgment result is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled by the jackpot gaming state, and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmed range nor within the reach confirmed range at the time of loss. This is the judgment result corresponding to.

It is only necessary that the pre-reading notice condition can be established when the winning determination result is either a jackpot or a losing super reach. In addition, if the current prize winning determination result is either jackpot or loss super reach confirmed, and all previous winning prize determination results corresponding to the pending memory are all loss general. may be possible. Note that if the execution of a pre-read notice performance that is a continuous notice performance has already been set to start, a restriction may be made so that the pre-read notice condition is not satisfied.

If the pre-read notice condition is not satisfied (step AKS101; No), the pre-read notice setting process is ended. If the pre-read notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read notice (step AKS102). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the execution of a pre-read notice, and referring to the pre-read notice execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 according to the winning determination result. Whether or not to execute a pre-read preview effect may be determined by determining whether or not to perform a pre-read preview effect. In step AKS102, either "not executed" in the case where the pre-read preview effect is not executed, or "with execution" in the case where the pre-read preview effect is executed is determined. Regarding the determination result at this time, it is determined whether or not it has been determined that "execution is to be performed" (step AKS103).

If it is determined that the pre-read preview effect is not executed (step AKS103; No), the pre-read preview setting process is ended. If it is determined that the pre-read preview performance is to be executed (step AKS103; Yes), the remaining number of times is set (step AKS104). In step AKS104, the number of pending memories may be set as the remaining number of times. Subsequently, a continuous performance pattern is determined (step AKS105). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a continuous performance pattern, and referring to a continuous performance pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared according to the winning determination result, a continuous performance pattern can be created. may be determined to be one of a plurality of patterns.

After determining the continuous performance pattern in step AKS105, a pre-read preview setting is performed (step AKS106), and the pre-read preview setting process is ended. In step AKS106, for example, a pre-read preview flag provided in a predetermined area (effect control flag setting section, etc.) of the RAM 122 may be set to an on state.

In such a pre-read notice setting process, if the winning judgment result is either a jackpot or a super reach in case of a loss, the pre-read notice condition in step AKS101 can be satisfied, and the pre-read notice execution in step AKS102 can be performed. It becomes possible to determine the presence or absence and the continuous performance pattern based on step AKS105. If the winning judgment result is a jackpot, even if step AKS102 determines to execute the pre-read preview effect at a higher rate than when the winning judgment result is a loss and the super reach is confirmed. good. Further, in step AKS105, the continuous performance pattern may be determined at a different rate when the winning determination result is a jackpot than when the winning determination result is a loss and super reach is confirmed. In this way, it is only necessary to be able to execute a continuous preview performance, which is a pre-read preview performance, based on the winning determination result, which is a pre-read determination result.

FIG. 42-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process that can be executed in step S171 of FIG. 39 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 42-7, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol etc. that will be the final decorative symbol as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (step AKS201). The production control CPU 120 displays the final stop symbol based on variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. All you have to do is decide. The fluctuation pattern designation command and the display result notification command are mainly performed by setting the command to be sent at the start of the special symbol fluctuation when the fluctuation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the production control board 12. The variation pattern designation command is a production control command that designates the variation pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is a production control command that specifies the variable display result determined using the random value for determining the special figure display result. As an example, the variable display contents depending on the combination of fluctuation patterns and variable display results include "non-reach (lose)", "reach (lose)", "non-probable variable (jackpot)", and "probable variable (jackpot)". Good to have.

If the variable display content is "Non-reach (lose)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol will not change to the reach state, and the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be It becomes a “lose”. If the variable display content is "Reach (Lose)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the "Reach" state, the determined decorative symbol of the Reach Loss combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be "Lose". becomes. When the variable display content is "non-probable change (jackpot)", the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot", and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes a time-saving state. When the variable display content is "probability variable (jackpot)", the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot", and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes a probability variable state.

In step AKS201, for example, when the variable display content is "non-probable change (jackpot)", a combination of fixed ornamental symbols that are the same even numbered symbols is determined as the final stop symbol. In addition, when the variable display content is "probable change (jackpot)", it is sufficient if it is possible to determine a combination of determined ornamental symbols that are the same odd-numbered symbols as the final stop symbol. When the variable display content is "reach (lose)", a combination of fixed ornamental symbols that is a combination that is out of reach is determined as the final stop symbol. If the variable display content is "non-reach (lose)", a combination of fixed decorative symbols that will be a non-reach (loss) combination is determined as the final stop symbol. When determining a combination of fixed decorative symbols, for example, by extracting numerical data that is a random number value for determining the symbol, and referring to a symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 according to the variable display contents, What is necessary is to determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern.

After determining the final stop symbol, etc., the operation section performance is determined (step AKS202). In step AKS202, it is determined whether or not a pre-read preview effect is being executed. For example, if the pre-read preview flag is on, it may be determined that the pre-read preview effect is being executed. When the pre-read preview performance is being executed, the remaining number of times is subtracted by 1, and the operating section performance pattern may be determined according to the remaining number of times after the subtraction and the continuous performance pattern. The continuous effect pattern determined in step AKS105 of the advance notice setting process may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. If the remaining number of times after the subtraction is "0", the prefetch notice flag may be cleared to turn it off.

In step AKS202, if it is determined that the prefetch preview performance is not being executed, the presence or absence of the operation section performance and the operation section performance pattern corresponding to the current variable display may be determined at a predetermined ratio. For example, extract numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the operation part performance, and refer to the operation part performance determination table stored in advance in the RAM 121 depending on whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or not. It is only necessary to be able to determine the presence or absence of the operation section performance, that is, whether or not to perform the operation section performance, and the operation section performance pattern used when executing the operation section performance. The operation part effects that are compatible with this variable display can be executed when it is determined that the pre-read preview effect is not being executed, and cannot be executed when it is determined that the pre-read preview effect is being executed. . Therefore, within the scope of the variable display where the operation part effect included in the pre-read preview effect is executed, the operation part effect corresponding to this variable display has a limit so that it cannot be executed while the variable display is being executed. There are restrictions such as:

In step AKS202, when a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect is executed in conjunction with a specific effect based on the variation pattern, execution of the operation part effect may be restricted. For example, when the SP reach A reach effect is executed, the execution of the operation unit effect may be limited by determining not to execute the operation unit effect at any timing. In this case, within the scope of the variable display in which the SP reach A reach effect is executed, a limit is set such that all operation section effects cannot be executed while the variable display is being executed. Alternatively, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, it is possible to decide to execute the operation part effect at a predetermined rate at the timing corresponding to the start of target fluctuation or when the reach is established, while it is possible to decide to execute the operation part effect at a predetermined rate at the timing corresponding to the start of target fluctuation or when the reach is established. Execution of the operation section performance may be restricted by determining not to perform the operation section performance at the timing corresponding to the time when the success/failure notification is triggered. In this case, within the scope of the variable display where the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, a limit is set so that some operation part effects cannot be performed while the variable display is being executed. . In addition, within the scope of the variable display in which a specific performance is performed, a limit may be set so that it is difficult for some or all of the operation part performances to be performed while the variable display is being performed. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 that determines the operation section performance in step AKS202 can restrict the execution of the operation section performance including the vibration performance when the special vibration performance is executed.

In addition, in the case where the operation part performance is determined in step AKS202, when a special performance different from the specific performance is executed based on the fluctuation pattern or the winning determination result, etc., the performance is lower than when the special performance is not executed. The determination ratio of the operation section effects may be set so that some or all of the operation section effects are likely to be executed during execution of the variable display.

After determining the operation part performance, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step AKS203). For example, the production control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared production control patterns (variable display production control patterns) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, and sets it as the usage pattern. . Further, the performance control CPU 120 may select one of a plurality of prepared performance control patterns (operation unit performance control patterns) in response to the operation unit performance determined in step AKS202 and set it as the usage pattern. good. Further, for example, an initial value of a performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area (performance control timer setting section, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set (step AKS204). Then, variations of decorative patterns and the like are started on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS205). At this time, for example, by transmitting a display control command specified by display control data included in the production control pattern (variable display production control pattern) determined in step AKS203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, the image It is sufficient to start the variation of the decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the display device 5.

After setting the start of variation, settings are made to update the pending display and the like in response to the start of the variable display (step AKS206). After updating the pending display, etc., the value of the production process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step AKS207), and then the variable display start setting process is ended.

FIG. 42-8 shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern includes a variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 42-8(A) and an operation section effect control pattern shown in FIG. 42-8(B). The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 42-8(A) executes various effects from the start to the end of the variable display of decorative symbols in response to the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern specification command. Contains control data used to control the The operation section effect control pattern shown in FIG. 42-8(B) includes control data used to control the execution of the operation section effect.

The variable display production control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, production control process timer judgment value, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, end code, etc. . The production control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) that is compared with the production control process timer value, which is the stored value of the production control process timer, and is a judgment value corresponding to the execution time (production time) of each production operation. is set in advance. In addition, instead of the performance control process timer judgment value, for example, the reception of a predetermined performance control command from the main board 11, or the execution of a predetermined process as a process for controlling the performance operation in the performance control CPU 120. Data indicating switching timing of production control, etc. may be set in correspondence with predetermined control content or processing content.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating the audio output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects and the like linked to the variable display of decorative symbols. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes data indicating the light emission driving mode of the light emitting bodies such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs during the variable display of decorative symbols. That is, the lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode of the light emitter during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The operation detection control data includes an effective detection period for effectively detecting the player's movements, such as a tilting operation on the operating lever of the stick controller 31A, an instruction operation on the trigger button, or a pressing operation on the push button 31B, and the effective detection period for each operation. It includes data indicating the performance operation mode according to the detection of the player's movement, such as data specifying the control details of the performance operation when the player's movement is effectively detected. The vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration motor 131 during the variable display of decorative symbols. That is, the vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable pattern.

Note that these control data do not have to be included in all production control patterns, but production control patterns that include some control data depending on the content of production operation by each production control pattern. There may be. Further, among the plurality of types of process data included in the production control pattern, the types of control data forming each process data may be different depending on the content of the production operation executed at each timing. In other words, some process data includes all of display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, while others include only a portion of these data. It's fine. Furthermore, various other control data such as movable body control data indicating the operation mode of the movable body 32 may be included.

In the variable display production process in step S172 of the production control process process, each time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. controls performance operations according to various types of corresponding control data. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps, 9, a light emitting body such as a decorative LED, a vibration motor 131, a movable body 32, etc.). In addition, in each process data #1 to process data #n, display control data #1 to display control data #n and audio control data #1 to audio control are associated with performance control process timer judgment values #1 to #n. Data #n, lamp control data #1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data #1 to operation detection control data #n, and vibration control data #1 to vibration control data #n control the production operations in the production device. It composes performance control execution data #1 to performance control execution data #n that indicates the content and specifies the execution of performance control.

The operation section production control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, production control process timer judgment value, lamp control data, vibration control data, and the like. The lamp control data of the operation section performance control pattern includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitters in the operation section performance, such as the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, for example. In other words, the lamp control data of the operation section performance control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B is made to emit light in the light emission performance included in the operation section performance. The vibration control data of the operation section presentation control pattern includes data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration generator in the operation section presentation, such as the drive of the vibration motor 131, for example. That is, the vibration control data of the operation section performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode when vibrating the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B in the vibration performance included in the operation section performance.

FIG. 42-9 shows an example of setting the timing at which the operation section effect can be executed in the vibration effect execution example AKE01. Timings AKT01 to AKT03 correspond to the case where the variable display of the decorative pattern that becomes the preliminary variation is started, and are timings at which the operation unit performance at the start of the preliminary variation can be executed. For example, when a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-read notice setting process, the operation unit performance is executed in some or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, depending on the remaining number of times. be able to. For example, if the remaining number of times is "3", the operation part effect can be executed at timing AKT01, and if the remaining number of times is "2", the operation part effect can be executed at timing AKT02, and the remaining number of times can be executed. is "1", the operation section effect can be executed at timing AKT03.

Timing AKT11 shown in FIG. 42-9 corresponds to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol that becomes the target change is started, and is the timing at which the operation unit performance at the start of the target change can be executed. For example, when a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-read notice setting process, the operation part according to the operation part performance pattern according to the remaining number of times is used in some or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations. After executing the performance, at timing AKT11 when the target variation starts, the operation unit performance can be performed using the operation unit performance pattern according to the remaining number of times “0”. Further, at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, the operation section effect may become executable. Specifically, when one of the operation section performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is determined in step AKS202, the operation section performance based on the determined operation section performance pattern is executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. be able to.

Timings such as timings AKT01 to AKT03 or timing AKT11, which correspond to the case where the variable display of decorative patterns is started, may be such that the operation section performance can be executed at the same time as the variable display of the decorative patterns is started. , the operation section effect may be executed when a certain period of time has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative pattern was started. In this way, the timing corresponding to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbols is started may be any timing that can be reached by starting the variable display of the decorative symbols.

Timings AKT12 to AKT14 shown in FIG. 42-9 are the operation section effects corresponding to the current variable display, including the operation section presentation when a reach is established, the operation section presentation when the reach is developed, and the operation section presentation when the win/fail notification is triggered. Each timing is feasible. For example, depending on the operation section effect pattern determined in step AKS202 of the variable display start setting process, the operation section effect can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, and the operation section effect can be executed at timing AKT13 when a reach has developed. In some cases, it becomes possible to execute the operation part effect, and in other cases, it becomes possible to execute the operation part effect at the timing AKT14 when the success/failure notification is triggered. Specifically, when one of the operation section performance patterns AKC21 and AKC22 is determined in step AKS202, the operation section performance based on the determined operation section performance pattern is executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established. Can be done. Furthermore, when either of the operation section performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 is determined in step AKS202, the operation section performance according to the determined operation section performance pattern can be executed at timing AKT13 when the reach is developed. Alternatively, when the operation section performance pattern AKC41 is determined in step ASK202, the operation section performance according to the determined operation section performance pattern can be executed at timing AKT14, which is the time for inciting the success/failure notification.

FIG. 42-10 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC01. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is white as shown in FIG. 42-10(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV01 shown in FIG. 42-10(B), This can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of preliminary fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 42-10(B), the vibration effect produced by the vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 42-10(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and may be turned off. The light emitting effect in which the emitted light color changes to white according to the on period of the vibration effect is that during the on period of 300 msec, for example, the first brightness of white light emitting brightness is high and the second brightness is low emitting brightness every 30 msec. By repeating this alternately, the white light emission brightness may change periodically.

FIG. 42-11 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC02 and AKC03. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC02 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes red as shown in FIG. 42-11(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 42-11(B), This can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of preliminary fluctuation. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC03 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is rainbow-colored as shown in FIG. 42-11(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 42-11(B). , can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of preliminary fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 42-11(B), the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 42-11(A), the light emitting effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 are continuously displayed in red in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect if the operation part effect pattern AKC02 is used. In the case of the operation section effect pattern AKC03, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the plurality of LEDs that make up the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in red, red-purple, blue-violet, blue, green, yellow, and orange colors that change depending on the elapsed time and the light-emitting position. , the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may emit light in rainbow colors. The light emitting position of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 can be specified in multiple sections, for example, the upper and lower parts of the lever lamp 9B1 and the entire button lamp 9B2, and the light emission time, color, and light emission can be specified according to each section. It is sufficient if part or all of the brightness can be set.

FIG. 42-12 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC11. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is white as shown in FIG. 42-12(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 42-12(B), This can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. As shown in FIG. 42-12(B), the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 42-12(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. The light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes white according to the on period of the vibration effect is that during the on period of 1500 ms, for example, the first brightness of the white light emitting brightness is high and the second brightness is low. By repeating this alternately, the white light emission brightness may change periodically.

FIG. 42-13 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC12 and AKC13. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes red as shown in FIG. 42-13(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 42-13(B), This can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is rainbow-colored as shown in FIG. 42-13(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 42-13(B). , can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. The vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds, as shown in FIG. 42-13(B). As shown in FIG. 42-13 (A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that when the operation part effect pattern AKC12 is used, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are intermittently red in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. In the case of the operation section effect pattern AKC13, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 can emit red light by alternately repeating a first brightness with high red light emission brightness and a second brightness with low light emission brightness every 20 milliseconds during the ON period of the vibration effect. The brightness may change periodically. In this case, the light emission effect included in the operation section effect according to the operation section effect pattern AKC12 is a light emission mode in which the luminance brightness is changed in a shorter cycle than the light emission effect included in the operation section effect according to the operation section effect pattern AKC11. becomes. In this manner, the reliability of the jackpot may be suggested by varying not only the color of the light emitted but also the period of the light emitted as a display mode of the light emitting effect. Note that during the on-period of the vibration effect, red light may be emitted intermittently, for example, by alternately repeating red light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds. As a presentation mode of the light emitting effect, while the light emitting cycle is the same, the reliability of the jackpot may be suggested by changing the light emitting color. In this way, for example, when the light emitting colors in the light emitting effect are different, the burden of controlling the light emitting effect can be reduced by making the light emitting period common.

FIG. 42-14 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC21. The operation unit performance according to the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 can be executed at timing AKT12 when the reach is established, corresponding to the performance AKR1 which is the performance when the reach is established as shown in FIG. 42-14(A). This includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color is pink as shown in (B), and a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV11 shown in FIG. 42-14(C). The performance AKR1, which is a performance when a reach is established, may be, for example, a performance that displays a performance image showing a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or a performance that displays a background image according to a reach formation. In addition, it may be any other performance that accompanies reach establishment. As shown in FIG. 42-14(C), the vibration effect produced by the vibration pattern AKV11 is a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated multiple times at predetermined time intervals (for example, 100 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 42-14(B), the light emitting effect accompanying this vibration effect causes the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 to emit pink light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and may be turned off.

FIG. 42-15 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC22. The operation section performance according to the operation section performance pattern AKC22 can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, corresponding to the performance AKR2 which is a performance when a reach is established as shown in FIG. 42-15 (A). This includes a light emitting effect in which the emitted light color is orange as shown in (B), and a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV12 as shown in FIG. 42-15(C). The performance AKR2, which is a performance when a reach is established, may be, for example, a performance that displays a performance image indicating a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or a performance that displays a background image according to a reach formation. In addition, it may be any other performance that accompanies reach establishment. It is sufficient that the performance mode is different between the performance AKR1 and the performance AKR2, which are the performance when the reach is established. As shown in Figure 42-15 (C), the vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV12 has an on period of the first vibration on time (for example, 100 milliseconds) and an off period of the first vibration off time (for example, 100 milliseconds). After repeating the vibration twice alternately, a vibration mode including an on period of a second vibration on time (for example, 250 milliseconds) and an on period of a third vibration on time (for example, 500 milliseconds) is obtained. As shown in FIG. 42-15(B), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and may be turned off. Furthermore, when the on-periods of the vibration effects are different, the light emission patterns of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be made different. For example, during the on period of the first vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 continuously emit light in orange. On the other hand, during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit light in orange. The lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 emit orange light intermittently by repeating orange light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time. do it.

The operation unit performance using the operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, in correspondence with the performances AKS1 and AKS2 that are the effects at the time of reach development, and the emission color is white. , vibration effects using vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In the case of the operation section performance pattern AKC31, the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV21 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKS1. In the case of the operation section performance pattern AKC32, the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV22 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKS2. Regarding the light emitting effects accompanying these vibration effects, in both of the operation section effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effects.

The operation unit performance using the operation unit performance pattern AKC41 can be executed corresponding to the success/failure agitation performance at timing AKT14, which is the time of the success/failure notification agitation, and includes a light emitting performance in which the emitted light color is gold, and a vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV31. ,including. The vibration effect produced by the vibration pattern AKV31 has a vibration mode with an on period of 1500 milliseconds or more. In the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit gold light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect.

As shown in Figures 42-12 and 42-13, among the operation effects that can be performed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the light emitting mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the emitted light color is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow-colored, which is different from white, and when the emitted light color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow-colored. In this case, a vibration effect using a vibration pattern AKV03 different from the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on whether the emitted light color is white or the emitted color is red or rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation part effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be used. It is possible to appropriately diversify performances and improve game interest. It should be noted that a vibration effect based on a common vibration pattern AKV03 is executed in both the case where the emitted light color is red and the case where the emitted light color is rainbow colored. In other words, the vibration mode of the vibration performance is the same whether the emitted light color is red or the emitted color is rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section effect is the same, a case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, include those that execute a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white in accordance with the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV02, such as the operation unit effect using the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. I'm here. The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT13, which is when the reach is developed, include the operation part effects using the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, and the light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. Contains things that In this way, the operation section effect executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, and the operation section effect executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, have the same luminescent color, white, and the vibration effect. A case is provided in which the vibration mode of is different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effects is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is the same, but the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that it is possible to use operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. It is possible to appropriately diversify performances and improve game interest. Note that the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, include those that execute light emission effects in which the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow colors, such as operation unit effects using the operation unit effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13. There is. As in this case, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, and the operation part effect executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, and the vibration effect The vibration mode may also be different. As in the case where the emitted light color becomes white, the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11 when the target change starts is different from the operation part effect executed at timing AKT13 when the reach is developed, and the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different. Contains things that are common. In addition, as in the case where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow-colored, the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11 when the target change starts is different from the operation part effect executed at timing AKT13 when the reach develops, and the emission color The display may include different lighting modes. The operation section performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops does not need to include a light emission mode that is different from the operation section performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts.

The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, include the operation part effect using the operation part effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. All of these operation section performances have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT14, which is the timing for inciting the success or failure notification, include those that execute a light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes golden along with the vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV31, such as the operation section effect using the operation section effect pattern AKC41. I'm here. This operation section performance has a jackpot reliability of 100%. In this way, the jackpot reliability is common at 100% between the operation part performance executed at timing AKT12 when reach is established and the operation part performance performed at timing AKT14 when the win/fail notification is triggered, and the vibration performance There are cases in which the vibration modes of the two are different. Further, the operation section effect executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established and the operation section effect executed at timing AKT14 when a win/fail notification is activated have different luminescent colors and different vibration modes of the vibration effect. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effects is different, the jackpot reliability is the same, but the stick controller 31A is different due to the vibration mode of the vibration effect or the light emission mode of the light emission effect being different. It is possible to appropriately diversify the performances using operating members such as and push button 31B, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target change starts are the operation section effects using the operation section effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13, and the emitted light color changes to white, red, or rainbow colors due to the vibration effects based on the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03. It includes something that executes a light-emitting effect. The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, include the operation part effect using the operation part effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. In this way, the light emitting mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, and the operation part effect executed at timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, and the vibration effect of the vibration effect is different. There are cases where the aspects are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effects is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately varied. This can improve the game's interest.

The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, include the operation part effect using the operation part effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. The operation section effects that can be executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, are the operation section effects using the operation section effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, and the light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration effects using the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. contains things. In this way, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation section effect executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established and the operation section effect executed at timing AKT13 when a reach is developed, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different. There are cases where the values are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section effects is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, or the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be changed. It is possible to improve gaming interest by appropriately diversifying the game. Note that the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established may include a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white. Further, the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed may include a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange. As a result, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, even if the light emission mode of the light emission effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be changed. It is possible to improve gaming interest by appropriately diversifying the game.

The reliability of the jackpot when the operation section performance is executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuation, is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100%, depending on the operation section performance pattern. The reliability of the jackpot when the operation section performance is executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100%, depending on the operation section performance pattern. When the operation section performance is executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, the jackpot reliability is 100% regardless of the operation section performance pattern. When the operation section performance is executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more regardless of the operation section performance pattern. When the operation section performance is executed at timing AKT14, which is the time of triggering the win/fail notification, the reliability of the jackpot is 100%. Therefore, the jackpot reliability when the operation part performance is executed may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance and the timing at which the vibration performance is performed. Furthermore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration production includes the vibration time according to the length of the on period, the vibration intensity due to the drive of the vibration motor 131, the combination of the on period and the off period, the combination of strong vibration and weak vibration in the vibration intensity, etc. , it is only necessary that the vibration patterns for vibrating the operating members such as the operating lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be made different.

The plurality of specific performances that can be executed according to the progress of the game include movable body movement, image display, music playback, jackpot confirmation notification, and jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 in the SP reach A reach performance. For example, the reach performance of SP Reach A has a jackpot reliability of about 40%. Therefore, when the vibration effect is executed by the operation part effect, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, and when it is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher. Become. The movable body movement, image display, and music playback in the SP reach A reach effect are all executed as part of the reach effect, so they do not individually have jackpot reliability. Further, the jackpot confirmation notification is an effect that definitely informs that the variable display result is a "jackpot". The jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are lottery performances of jackpot types according to the number of rounds, etc., corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is controlled. Jackpot confirmation notification and jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are similar to SP Reach A's reach effect in that the player can undoubtedly recognize that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state will be controlled. This is different from a performance that has a high reliability of hitting a jackpot. In this way, among a plurality of specific performances, for a specific performance that has jackpot reliability, the jackpot reliability will be higher if the vibration effect by the operation part effect is executed than if the specific effect is executed. It is sufficient if it is set as follows. Further, the jackpot reliability is set to be higher when the vibration effect based on the operation unit effect is executed than when the vibration effect based on the operation unit effect is not executed.

FIG. 42-16 shows an example of performing an effect by causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit light. The game effect lamp 9 includes an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, and a right frame lamp 9N, which are different from the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Here, a plurality of performance execution examples AKF01 to AKF04 are shown depending on the execution mode of the performance using light emission.

Effect execution example AKF01 causes the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit white light that matches the background display when the background display of the image display device 5 is white. , the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit red light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. For example, the operation section effect according to either of the operation section effect patterns AKC02 or AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the color of the emitted light becomes red along with a vibration effect.

Effect execution example AKF02 causes the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit red light that matches the background display when the background display of the image display device 5 is a red display color. , the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit rainbow-colored light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. For example, the operation section effect according to either of the operation section effect patterns AKC03 or AKC13 includes a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes rainbow-colored along with a vibration effect.

In the production execution example AKF03, when the background display of the image display device 5 changes from black to white from the left side to the right side, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are changed to the background display. At the same time, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit white light by a light emitting effect in the operation section effect. For example, the operation section performance according to any of the operation section performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration performance.

Effect execution example AKF04 causes the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit blue light that matches the character display when the character display on the image display device 5 is displayed in blue. , the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit white light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. For example, the operation section performance according to any of the operation section performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration performance.

For example, a predetermined effect by displaying a background display, character display, or any other effect image on the image display device 5 can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game, including variable display of decorative symbols. In the variable display effect process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, control data read from the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process is used to control the variable display, etc. Control is performed to execute a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game. This control data includes display control data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, and lamp control data for controlling the light emission of the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N. There is. When an operation section effect is executed while such a predetermined effect is being executed, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 cause the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to be controlled by a light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect in the operation section effect. It is possible to emit light in the following light emission mode. In the variable display performance process executed in step S172 of the performance control process, the operation part performance is controlled using the control data read from the operation part performance control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process. Control to execute is performed. This control data includes lamp control data that controls the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2, and vibration control data that controls the vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A by driving the vibration motor 131. It is included. In response to such a light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in the operation section effect, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect of the operation section effect in accordance with a predetermined effect. It is. In this way, by making the light emitting modes different between the operating members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and the other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N, light emission can be achieved. It is possible to appropriately diversify the presentation and improve the interest in the game.

In addition to or in place of the screen display of the image display device 5, the predetermined effect may be executed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this case, while causing the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit light in a color that matches the audio output such as BGM, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are operated. The light may be emitted in the color of the light emitting effect in the part effect. For example, when the speakers 8L and 8R output audio that is a message that gives the player an impression of red color, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are made to emit red light in accordance with the audio output. On the other hand, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be caused to emit white light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. Even in this case, by making the light emission mode different between the operating members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N, , it is possible to appropriately diversify effects using light emission and improve game interest. The predetermined effect is to darken the screen display of the image display device 5, stop audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and turn off the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, right frame lamp 9N, etc. You can also use it as When this predetermined effect is executed, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be vibrated by a vibration effect in the operation section effect. By executing the operation part effect while executing such a predetermined effect, the player's attention is further increased for the vibration effect that vibrates the operation members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. This can improve the player's interest in the game.

FIG. 42-17 shows an example of setting a performance period in which a specific interlocking performance can be executed in the vibration performance execution example AKE02. The period AKZ01 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed in conjunction with the movable body movement in the SP reach-A reach performance. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ01 includes a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes blue in accordance with the special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV41. The period AKZ02 is a period in which a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV42 can be executed in conjunction with the image display in the SP reach-A reach performance. The specific interlocking effects that can be executed during the period AKZ02 include a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes gold along with the special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV42. The period AKZ03 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV43 can be executed in conjunction with music playback in the SP reach-A reach performance. The specific interlocking effects that can be executed during the period AKZ03 include a specific light emission effect in which the light emitting color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A changes from blue to red to gold due to the special vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV43. .

The period AKZ04 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in response to the jackpot confirmation notification. The specific interlocking effects that can be executed during the period AKZ04 include a specific light emission effect in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A become rainbow colored in accordance with the special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV44. In addition, the jackpot confirmation notification includes stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative pattern that is the display result of the decorative pattern, displaying a production image of a scene in which an ally character wins a battle with an enemy character in a reach production, the speaker 8L, Any method that allows the player to recognize the jackpot by outputting a notification sound that confirms the jackpot with 8R, lighting up the jackpot confirmation notification lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient if the notification is to be executed.

It should be noted that, following the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC41 executed at timing AKT14, which is the time of triggering the win/fail notification, a specific interlocking performance during the period AKZ04 accompanying the jackpot confirmation notification may be performed. In this case, by executing a specific interlocking performance in conjunction with the jackpot confirmation notification while the player's expectation is heightened by the operation section performance, the impression of the performance can be enhanced and the game's interest can be improved. When performing a specific interlocking effect following such an operation section effect, the vibration mode of the vibration effect or special vibration effect may be different between the operation section effect and the specific interlocking effect, or the light emitting effect or specific light emitting effect may be different. The light emission mode may also be made different. For example, the vibration intensity may be made different between the vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The light emission brightness may be made different between the light emission effect and the specific light emission effect. By varying the vibration mode and light emitting mode to give a sharp presentation, it is possible to easily distinguish between an operation section presentation and a specific interlocking presentation, thereby appropriately diversifying the presentation and improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be done.

The period AKZ05 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in conjunction with the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ05 is a specific light emission in which when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed, the light emission color of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B becomes white due to the special vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes performance. A specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ05 is that when the jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed, the emitted light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes rainbow-colored due to the special vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes light-emitting effects.

FIGS. 42-18 to 42-20 show the case where SP reach A reach effect is executed. FIG. 42-18 shows performance execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 when the movable body motion in the SP reach A reach performance is executed. FIG. 42-19 shows performance execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 when image display in the SP reach A reach performance is executed. FIG. 42-20 shows performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23 when music reproduction is executed in the SP reach A reach performance.

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-reach mode and the normal ready-to-reach presentation is being executed, the position of the movable body 32 is not changed from the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 32 may be any position in front of the lower end with respect to the display screen of the image display device 5. Subsequently, when the reach performance of SP reach A is started due to reach development, the position of the movable body 32 is changed from the initial position, and the movable body movement is performed as in the performance execution example AKG01. At this time, the position of the movable body 32 is changed by upward linear movement or parallel movement from the initial position, and at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window provided inside the movable body 32, "SP An effect image showing a message such as "Reach A" is displayed. Thereafter, as the position change of the movable body 32 continues, the position of the movable body 32 passes near the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, as in the production execution example AKG02. At this time, at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window of the movable body 32, an effect image showing a message such as "This fluctuation is..." is displayed.

With the change in the position of the movable body 32 resulting in movable body movements such as the performance execution examples AKG01 and AKG02, a specific interlocking performance is executed to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effects that are executed together with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of SP Reach A are a special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV41 and a specific light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes blue during the period AKZ01 shown in Figure 42-17. , contains. Furthermore, when the position change of the movable body 32 continues and the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front of the upper end on the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the production execution example AKG03, the specific linked production in the period AKZ01 ends. do. For example, the period AKZ01 corresponding to the time when the position of the movable body 32 reaches from the front of the lower end to the front of the upper end with respect to the initial position of the display screen is 2500 milliseconds, and the stick controller 31A is continuously operated during this period AKZ01. A special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode that is an on period in which the lever or push button 31B is vibrated. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, the special vibration performance may be performed in a vibration manner in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched every 250 milliseconds between an on period in which the stick controller vibrates and an off period in which it does not vibrate. Further, the specific light emission effect may be executed in a light emission mode in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A continuously emits blue light over the period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a specific light emission effect is executed in a light emission mode that switches the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A between blue light emission (on) and non-light emission (lights off) every 250 milliseconds. Good too.

When a movable body operation in a reach performance of SP reach A such as production execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 is executed, the position of the movable body 32 in the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N is changed, for example. Accordingly, light may be emitted in a light emission pattern in which the light emission color and luminance gradually change from the bottom to the top. For example, in the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N, when the position of the movable body 32 is changed, the emitted light color changes to blue, and the emitted light brightness changes in a wave shape depending on the height and time. All you have to do is emit light.

After the movable body movement is completed as in the performance execution example AKG03, a performance image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as an image display in the SP reach A reach performance as in the performance execution example AKG11. At this time, for example, text indicating the message "Super Hot" is displayed in gold. Further, as in the production execution example AKG12, an effect image can be added and displayed around the character display.

Along with the display of performance images such as the performance execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, a specific linked performance is executed to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effects that are executed together with the image display in the reach effect of SP Reach A are a special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV42, a specific light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes gold, in the period AKZ02 shown in Figure 42-17. Contains. When the character display indicating the message ends and the display of a performance image in a reach performance different from the text display starts, as in the performance execution example AKG13, the specific linked performance in period AKZ02 ends. For example, the period AKZ02 corresponding to the character display indicating the message "Very Hot" is 1000 milliseconds, and during this period AKZ02, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated. A special vibration effect may be executed in a different manner. In addition, during the period AKZ02, the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is set to a light emitting mode that alternately repeats the first brightness, which has a high golden light emitting brightness, and the second brightness, which has a low light emitting brightness, every 10 milliseconds. A specific light emission effect may be executed.

When the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A like effect execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 is executed, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example. It is sufficient that the emitted light color is gold in accordance with the image display and the emitted light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. For example, as the effect images are displayed as in the effect execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N change to gold color, as in the effect execution example AKG13. When the display of the effect image starts, it is sufficient to emit light in a color different from gold.

After the display of the performance image as in the performance execution example AKG13 is started, the sound of the music phrase PH01 is outputted by the speakers 8L and 8R as in the performance execution example AKG21 as music reproduction in the reach performance of SP reach A. Subsequently, as in production execution example AKG22, the speakers 8L and 8R output the audio of the music phrase PH02. Thereafter, as in production execution example AKG23, the speakers 8L and 8R output the sound of the music phrase PH03. In this way, it is only necessary to perform the entire music playback in the SP reach A reach performance by sequentially outputting the sounds of the plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 in accordance with the progress of the performance.

In conjunction with the output of the sound that plays music such as the performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23, a specific interlocking performance is executed to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking performance that is executed with the music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A is a special vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV43, a change in the luminous color from blue to red, and It includes a specific light emitting effect that changes from red to gold. In the production execution example AKG21, a specific light emission production in which the light emission color becomes blue is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH01. In the production execution example AKG22, a specific light emission production in which the light emission color becomes red is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH02. In the production execution example AKG23, a specific light emission production in which the light emission color becomes gold is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH03. In this way, it is only necessary to execute a specific light emitting effect in which the emitted light color changes to a plurality of colors as the voices of a plurality of musical phrases PH01 to PH03 are sequentially output as the effect progresses.

FIG. 42-21 shows a music reproduction execution example AKH01 in which the musical scale changes in order as the performance progresses. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 42-21(A), during the period AKZ03 in which the specific interlocking effect can be executed with music playback, each of C, R, E, F, G, A, C, and C is displayed. Sounds corresponding to the musical scale are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Here, the C scale that is output last may be one octave higher than the C scale that is output first.

Such specific interlocking effects that accompany music playback include a specific light emission effect in which the emitted light color changes as shown in Figure 42-21 (B), and a special light emission effect that uses a vibration pattern as shown in Figure 42-21 (C). It includes a vibration performance, which is a vibration performance, and can be executed in a period AKZ03 corresponding to music playback. The vibration effect shown in FIG. 42-21(C) has a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated a plurality of times in accordance with the output period of the audio corresponding to each scale. As shown in FIG. 42-21(B), the specific light emitting effect accompanying this special vibration effect is performed using the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale and the ON period of the special vibration effect. The emitted light color changes sequentially from blue to red to gold. During the stop period of the audio output and the off period of the special vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and may be turned off. Note that during the audio output period corresponding to each scale, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect may be made different for each scale. For example, the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is made to emit blue light continuously over a period of time during which the first C scale is output. Next, during a certain period of the scale of ``R'', the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is caused to emit light in a light emission mode that alternately repeats a first brightness with a high red light emission brightness and a second brightness with a low light emission brightness. Thereafter, during a certain period of the Mi scale, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit light in a light emitting mode that switches between golden light emitting (lighting up) and non-emitting light (lighting out). In this way, by providing a light emitting mode in which the amount of light emitted differs depending on the color of light corresponding to each musical scale, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects and improve the interest in the game.

The reach effect of SP reach A is executable controlled by using control data read from the variable display effect control pattern in accordance with the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 42-8(A) uses lamp control data and vibration control data to perform specific effects such as movable body movement, image display, and music playback in the reach effect of SP Reach A. It is set to be able to execute specific linked effects. In the specific interlocking effect, it is possible to execute a special vibration effect using any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The vibration mode is different between the special vibration performance using any of these vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and the vibration performance using the vibration pattern in the operation section performance. In this way, the vibration mode is different between the vibration performance in the operation section performance that can be executed regardless of the specific performance and the special vibration performance in the specific linked performance that can be executed in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance, so that the stick controller 31A and It is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as the push button 31B, thereby improving the interest in the game.

When performing the operation section effect, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light using the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2, along with the vibration effect that vibrates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A light emitting effect is executed. When performing a specific interlocking effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 are used to vibrate the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, along with a special vibration effect that vibrates the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A specific light emitting effect that causes light to emit light is executed. By executing an effect that includes vibration and light emission of operating members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, a player who has been paying attention to the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, can enjoy the image display and By recognizing the vibrations and light emission of different operating members, the unexpectedness of the performance can be increased.

In the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 42-17, with the movement of the movable body 32, which is the movable object movement in the reach effect of SP reach A, a specific linked effect including a special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV41 becomes executable. In this way, by being able to perform the special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable body 32, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, thereby improving the game's interest.

In the period AKZ04 shown in FIG. 42-17, in response to the jackpot confirmation notification, a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV44 becomes executable. In this way, by being able to perform a special vibration effect in conjunction with the notification that the jackpot game state is being controlled, the effects using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, thereby improving the interest in the game. be able to.

The specific interlocking performance includes a specific light emission performance in which the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in conjunction with a special vibration performance based on any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The light emitting performance accompanying the vibration performance in the operation section performance and the specific light emission performance accompanying the special vibration performance in the specific interlocking performance differ in light emitting modes such as emitted light color. In this way, by changing the light emission mode depending on the operation part performance and the specific interlocking performance, the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 42-10 and 42-11, among the operation effects that can be performed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the emitted light color is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow colored, which is different from white, and when the emitted light color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow colored. If so, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. As shown in Figures 42-12 and 42-13, among the operation effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the emitted light color is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color is red or rainbow-colored, which is different from white, and when the emitted color is white, a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and the emitted color becomes red or rainbow-colored. A vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03 is executed. Therefore, the timing to be executed is different between the vibration effects of the operation part effect that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary variation, and the vibration effects of the operation part effect, which can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. In addition to being different, the vibration modes are also different. In addition, the emitted light color is white and red for the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at timing AKT01, which is the start of the preliminary variation, and the vibration effect of the operation unit effect, which can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. By being one of the rainbow colors, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common. In this way, by providing a case in which the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different while the light emitting mode of the light emission effect is the same when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, operations such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be performed. The interest in the game can be improved by appropriately diversifying the effects using the members.

The vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary variation, is executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, based on the winning judgment result, which is the pre-read judgment result. Executed in the variable display before the variable display to be executed. In this way, by varying the timing at which the operation unit performances are performed, it is possible to appropriately diversify the performances using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and improve the interest in the game.

As shown in Figures 42-10 and 42-11, among the operation effects that can be performed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, the light emitting mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the emitted light color is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow color, which is different from white, and when the emitted color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emitted color becomes red or rainbow color. If so, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on whether the emitted light color is white or the emitted color is red or rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation part effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be used. It is possible to appropriately diversify performances and improve game interest. It should be noted that a vibration effect based on a common vibration pattern AKV02 is executed in both the case where the emitted light color is red and the case where the emitted light color is rainbow colored. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same whether the emitted light color is red or the emitted color is rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is the same, a case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous notice performance is an operation part performance pattern in which the light emitting color differs depending on whether the remaining number of times is other than "0" or when the remaining number of times is "0". There are some that include. For example, the continuous performance pattern AKD02 shown in FIG. 42-5(A) is the operation part performance pattern AKC01 when the remaining number of times is "1" and the operation part performance pattern AKC12 when the remaining number of times is "0". , contains. The operation section performance according to the operation section performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is white. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC12 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes red. Therefore, the light emission effect accompanied by the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and the light emission effect accompanied by the vibration effect of the operation element effect, which can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the time when the target change starts. The light emission mode differs between the two. In this way, by providing cases where the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified. It is possible to improve the game's interest.

In the continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous preview performance, the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is small is higher than the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large. is set to prevent it from becoming worse. For example, in the continuous performance pattern shown in FIG. 42-5(A), if the operation part performance pattern is AKC02 when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0" This is set to prevent the operation section performance pattern AKC11 from occurring. If the operation part performance pattern is AKC03 when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance pattern AKC11 or the operation part performance pattern AKC12 will be used as the operation part performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". It is set to prevent. This prevents the operation section effect with low jackpot reliability from being executed later, such as at the start of the target variation, even though the operation section effect with high jackpot reliability is executed first at the start of the preliminary variation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without lowering the player's expectations.

In addition, as shown in Figures 42-10 and 42-11, among the operation effects that can be performed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is Including cases where the emitted light is white, and cases where the emitted light color is red or rainbow color different from white, when the emitted light color is white, the emitted light is emitted in accordance with the on period and off period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01. and non-emission are repeated, and when the emitted light color becomes red, it emits light continuously in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in Figures 42-12 and 42-13, among the operation effects that can be performed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the light emitting mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the emitted light color is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color is different from white, such as red or rainbow color, and when the emitted color is white, the emitted light is emitted in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02, and the emitted light color becomes red. In this case, the light is emitted intermittently in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV03. Since the vibration effects using the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 have different on-period settings, the light emission modes such as the light emission period in the light emission effects will differ. Even in this case, it is only necessary to provide a case where the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different when the timing of executing the operation section effect is different.

(Modified examples of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
Regarding the operation part performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration display, the light emission mode of the light emission display, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. Regarding the specific interlocking performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1, etc.

Regarding the operation part effects, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be varied depending on the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the settings of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the value. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be varied depending on the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value of . In addition, regarding the operation part performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the vibration display, the light emission mode of the light emission display, and the jackpot reliability may be varied depending on any advantageous degree regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, Different ratios may be determined depending on such advantages. Regarding the specific interlocking performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to any advantageous level regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, Different ratios may be determined depending on such advantages.

If the timing of executing the operation part effect is different or the same, if the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different or the same, or if the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different or the same, the jackpot reliability will be Combinations in each case, such as different cases and common cases, can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the timing of execution is different or the same for the operation part effect and the specific linked effect, when the vibration mode of the vibration effect or special vibration effect is different or the same, the light emission mode of the light emission effect or specific light emission effect. The combinations in each case, such as when the numbers are different and when they are the same, can be arbitrarily set depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, when the vibration modes of the vibration effects are different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the light emission effects can be reduced by making the light emission modes of the light emission effects common. When the light emission modes of the light emission effects are different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the vibration effects can be reduced by making the vibration modes of the vibration effects common. When some vibration modes in the vibration effects are different, it is only necessary to reduce the control burden of the vibration effects by making other vibration modes in the vibration effects common. For example, when the vibration intensities of the vibration performances are different, it is sufficient that the control burden of the vibration performances can be reduced by making the vibration periods of the vibration performances common. When some light emitting modes in a light emitting effect are different, it is sufficient if the burden of controlling the light emitting effect can be reduced by making other light emitting modes in the light emitting effect common. For example, when the light emitting colors in the light emitting effects are different, the burden of controlling the light emitting effects can be reduced by making the light emitting cycle common in the light emitting effects. It is sufficient if the control burden can be reduced by similarly standardizing the vibration mode of the special vibration effect and the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect.

In addition to or instead of executing the variable display, when the game is controlled to be in any game state such as a small win game state or a jackpot game state, the operation section performance or specific interlocking performance is executed. It may be possible. For example, when the game is controlled to be a small winning game state, a predetermined percentage is determined depending on whether or not the V winning attacker is opened, the opening time, the number of times the player is opened, or the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state that is controlled after the occurrence of the V winning attacker. It may also be possible to perform the operation section performance with. When controlled in a jackpot gaming state, the presence or absence of time-saving control or probability change control after the jackpot gaming state ends, the termination conditions, and the rank-up that will result in an increased number of rounds than the number of rounds announced earlier in the jackpot gaming state. It may also be possible to perform the operation section effect at a predetermined rate depending on the presence or absence, amount of increase, etc. It may be possible to execute a specific interlocking performance in conjunction with a specific performance, such as movable object movement, image display, and music playback in a small winning game state or a jackpot gaming state.

The specific performance that can be executed as a specific interlocking performance may be any performance that can be executed depending on the execution of the variable display, or may be any performance that can be executed regardless of the execution of the variable display. For example, unlike a reach effect, if a variable display result at a predetermined rate becomes a "jackpot" and a suggestion effect is executed that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, a specific effect may occur during some or all of the effect periods. It may also be possible to perform linked effects.

When controlled to an arbitrary performance state, an operation section performance or a specific interlocking performance may be made executable. For example, when the production state is controlled to be a special production mode, the operation section production or specific linked production is performed at a higher rate than when the production state is controlled to a production mode different from the special production mode. It may be possible.

The operating member capable of performing effects using vibrations or light emission may be any motion detecting member configured to be able to detect the player's motion. For example, it may be a sensor that detects an operation on a jog dial that can be rotated, or it may be a sensor that detects a contact operation or a pressing operation on a touch panel. Furthermore, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined action by a player may be used, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. The player's actions may be detected by analyzing the results of photographing the player's hands or the like using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). In addition, any configuration that can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined action by a player may be used. Along with such a motion detection member, a contact member that can be touched by a player's hand or the like may be provided, and the contact member may vibrate or emit light together with the motion detection member or separately from the motion detection member. .

The vibration effects included in the operation section effects can correspond to the vibration effects in the feature part 48AK, the predetermined vibration effects in the feature part 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the feature part 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation section effects, the vibration effects included in the operation section effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the pre-variation start times, can correspond to the first vibration effects in the characteristic section 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects, the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts can correspond to the second vibration effect in the characteristic unit 50AK. The light emitting effects included in the operation part effects include a light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect in the feature part 48AK, a light emitting effect accompanying a predetermined vibration effect in the feature part 49AK, and a light emission effect accompanying the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the feature part 50AK. Compatible with light emitting effects. Among the light emitting effects included in the operation section effects, the light emitting effects associated with the vibration effects included in the operation effect that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, are the light emitting effects associated with the first vibration effect in the feature section 50AK. Can be adapted to performances. Among the light emitting effects included in the operation section effects, the light emitting effects associated with the vibration effects included in the operation effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, are the light emitting effects associated with the second vibration effect in the feature section 50AK. I can handle it. The special vibration performance included in the specific linked performance can correspond to the special vibration performance in the feature section 49AK.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modified examples, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always performed through the jackpot state or small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 operates. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base state) can be achieved without operating the special variable winning ball device 7. ).

In addition, as the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the winning symbol or may be a part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using special random numbers for the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols or jackpot symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for a small winning symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot lottery, a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

Moreover, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, if the time saving symbol is won, there will be no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor will there be a lottery to determine the number of time reductions.

In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol at all setting values. are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether using a special random number or another random number, the starting opening (first starting winning opening), It is sufficient to win at the time of winning in the second starting prize opening).

In addition, for winnings when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers), and the small winning symbol is used in the time-saving symbol lottery. When using random numbers, the random number of a specific small winning symbol can be used as the winning value, and when the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the time saving symbol lottery, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable prize winning ball device 7, and the passage of the game ball through the time saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time saving symbol.

In addition, when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed using a structure, when the small winning symbol is used in combination with the time-saving symbol, the variable display number of the time-saving state (time-saving number) is set so that it does not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. Make it.

In addition, regarding winning when a time-saving symbol is drawn, if a winning symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and if a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific winning symbol is used as the winning value. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state, no matter which random number is used for the lottery. . However, if the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time saving state, even if the number of time saving times is reset or the lottery is not selected, this may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed can be a plurality of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time-saving granting conditions can be made different for each time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Further, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings awarded may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

In addition, a drawing lottery for the time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-saving times may be set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

Further, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small winning state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after hitting a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability low base state is controlled when the gaming hall opens. After the high probability low base state is finished after variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated.

Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to be a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 48AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes an operation means that can be operated by the player, a vibration performance execution means that can perform a vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates, and an operation means that is accompanied by the vibration performance. and a light emitting effect execution means capable of executing a light emitting effect that emits light. The rate at which the vibration effect is controlled to an advantageous state varies depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed. The aspects are different. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emitting effect may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting light according to the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the vibration presentation is executed is higher may be determined by, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the operation section presentation pattern. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed means that, for example, it is possible to win a jackpot depending on the emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern and the purpose of the operation part effect pattern. It may be something like reliability. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, for example, as long as it is the emission color and vibration pattern AKV01 to AKV03 included in the operation section effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at a timing when the variable display becomes a ready-to-reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the ready mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the vibration performance at a timing when the development performance is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the vibration performance at a timing at which a notification performance for notifying whether or not the control is to be controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display starts includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is red or a rainbow color. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode, The vibration mode may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common as long as the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when they are executed. The aspects may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to be advantageous may be common as long as the jackpot reliability is 100%, for example. The vibration modes may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, and the vibration mode may also be different. Here, the light emission mode may be different as long as, for example, the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified depending on the timing, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the advanced effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode. Here, the vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

A first light emitting means for causing the operating means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the game is performed while the predetermined effect is being executed. When a vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner of a light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting effect in accordance with a predetermined effect. There may be. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 or the button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, or the right frame lamp 9N. The predetermined effect may be, for example, displaying a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect execution means may be, for example, the image display device 5. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibrating effect execution means is provided with a line-of-sight guide effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guide effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is configured to perform a line-of-sight guide effect at a first timing and at a second timing subsequent to the first timing. , the vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is at the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guide effect execution means It may also be possible to perform the line-of-sight guidance performance before the vibration performance is performed at the second timing without performing the guidance performance. Here, the line-of-sight guiding effect execution means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L, 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timing T1 or T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3 or T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be the timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3, for example. If the eye-gaze guiding effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be the case, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 49AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes an operation means that can be operated by the player, and a vibration production that can perform a predetermined vibration production and a special vibration production as a vibration production in which the operation means vibrates. The predetermined vibration effect includes an execution means, a light emission effect execution means capable of executing a light emission effect in which the operating means emits light in accordance with a predetermined vibration effect, and a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect according to the progress of the game. The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when a predetermined vibration effect is executed than when it is not executed. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the situation, and the vibration performance execution means can execute a special vibration performance in conjunction with the execution of a specific performance, and the vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance. . Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 based on vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part performance control pattern and the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. Bye. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The specific performance may be, for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, or the like. The specific performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the predetermined vibration performance is executed is higher may be determined by, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the operation section performance pattern. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed depends on, for example, the light emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern and the purpose of the operation part effect pattern. It may be anything such as jackpot reliability. The fact that the special vibration performance can be executed may be, for example, the execution of the vibration performance during the periods AKZ01 to AKZ05. The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance, for example, as long as the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 are different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance at a timing when the variable display becomes a ready-to-reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the ready mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance at a timing when an advanced performance is executed after the variable display becomes a ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance at a timing when a notification performance is executed to notify whether or not the control is to be controlled to an advantageous state. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display starts includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode is the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect may be different between the case where the light emission effect is executed in the light emission mode and the case where the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second light emitting mode may be a case where the emitted light color is red or rainbow color, for example. The different vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Yes, the vibration mode may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common as long as the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. , the vibration mode may be different. Here, the common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be the case, for example, if the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration modes may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready mode may have different light emission modes and vibration modes. Here, the light emission mode may be different as long as, for example, the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified depending on the timing, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. . Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

A first light emitting means for causing the operating means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the game is performed while the predetermined effect is being executed. When a predetermined vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner of a light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting effect in accordance with the predetermined effect. It may be possible. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 or the button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, or the right frame lamp 9N. The predetermined effect may be, for example, displaying a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect execution means may be, for example, the image display device 5. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibrating effect execution means is provided with a line-of-sight guide effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guide effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is configured to perform a line-of-sight guide effect at a first timing and at a second timing subsequent to the first timing. , the predetermined vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is at the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guide effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined vibration effect at the first timing or the second timing. It may also be possible to perform the eye-gaze guidance performance before the predetermined vibration performance is performed at the second timing without performing the eye-gaze guidance performance. Here, the line-of-sight guiding effect execution means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L, 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timing T1 or T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3 or T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be the timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3, for example. If the eye-gaze guiding effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be the case, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the specific effect is executed. Here, the rate of being controlled to be in an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot expectation level of 50% or more, which is higher than when the SP reach A reach effect is executed.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the predetermined vibration effect and improve the interest in the game.

The specific performance execution means may be able to execute a performance that causes the movable member to operate as the specific performance, and the vibration performance execution unit may be capable of executing a special vibration performance during the operation period of the movable member. Here, the effect of moving the movable member may be, for example, effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03. The special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member may be, for example, a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV41.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration effects and improve the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a special vibration performance in response to notification that the control is in an advantageous state. Here, the notification that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot confirmation notification. The special vibration effect accompanying this notification may be, for example, a vibration effect using a vibration pattern AKV44.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration effects and improve the interest in the game.

The light emitting effect execution means is capable of executing a specific light emitting effect in which the operating means emits light in accordance with the special vibration effect, and the light emission mode is different between the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the specific light emitting effect accompanying the special vibration effect. Good too. Here, the specific light emission performance may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data included in the variable display performance control pattern. The light emission mode may be different, for example, if the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from the case where the light emission color is blue, gold, or changes from blue to gold through red.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting effects accompanying the vibration effects and improve the game's interest.

When the special vibration performance is executed, a restriction means for restricting the execution of the predetermined vibration performance may be provided. Here, the limiting means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 when determining the operation section performance in step AKS202.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform the vibration effect and improve the interest in the game.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 50AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and has an operation means that can be operated by the player, and is capable of performing a first vibration performance and a second vibration performance as a vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates. The apparatus includes a vibration performance execution means and a light emission performance execution means capable of executing a light emission performance that causes the operating means to emit light in conjunction with the vibration performance, and when the vibration performance is performed, the vibration performance is better than when the vibration performance is not performed. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is high, and the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is different depending on the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance, and the timing at which the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance are executed is different. are different, and the vibration modes are different, and the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The first vibration performance may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using vibration patterns AKV01 and AKV02 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03. The second vibration performance may be, for example, driving the drive motor 131 using vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emitting effect may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting light according to the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the vibration presentation is executed is higher may be determined by, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the operation section presentation pattern. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect may be different, for example, as long as it is the jackpot reliability depending on the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern. The first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be performed at different timings, for example, as long as the preliminary fluctuation start timings AKT01 to AKT03 are different from the target fluctuation start timing AKT11. The vibration mode may be different between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance, for example, as long as the vibration pattern AKV01 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03. The fact that the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect is, for example, when the light emission color included in the operation part effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 is white, red, or rainbow color. etc. is fine.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, the timing AKT11 of starting the target variation.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration performance at a timing when the variable display becomes a ready-to-reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the ready mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration performance at a timing when the development performance is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration performance at a timing at which a notification performance for notifying whether or not the control is controlled to be in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the second vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode is different from the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the second vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in one light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is red or a rainbow color. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is changed by the second vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display starts, and the second vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. They are common, and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common as long as the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The second vibration performance that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the second vibration performance that is executed at the timing when the notification performance is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. , and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be the case, for example, if the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration modes may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode, the light emitting mode of the light emission effect is different, and even if the vibration mode is different. good. Here, the light emission mode may be different as long as, for example, the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect depending on the timing.

The vibration mode is different between the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Good too. Here, the vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

A first light emitting means for causing the operating means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the game is performed while the predetermined effect is being executed. When the second vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the second vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect according to the predetermined effect. It may also be possible to emit light. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 or the button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, or the right frame lamp 9N. The predetermined effect may be, for example, displaying a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect execution means may be, for example, the image display device 5. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibrating effect execution means is provided with a line-of-sight guide effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guide effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is configured to perform a line-of-sight guide effect at a first timing and at a second timing subsequent to the first timing. , the second vibration performance can be executed in a common vibration manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guidance performance execution means It may be possible to perform the eye-gaze guidance performance without performing the eye-gaze guidance performance at one timing and before the second vibration performance is performed at the second timing. Here, the line-of-sight guiding effect execution means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L, 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timing T1 or T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3 or T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be the timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3, for example. If the eye-gaze guiding effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be the case, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the first vibration performance in the variable display before the variable display in which the second vibration performance is executed, based on the pre-read determination result. Here, the variable display before the variable display corresponding to the pending storage may be, for example, a variable display that is a prior change.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the first vibration effect includes a light emitting mode during the first vibration and a light emitting mode during the second vibration which is different from the light emitting mode during the first vibration, and the light emitting effect is the light emitting mode during the first vibration. The vibration mode of the first vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in the second vibration mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second vibration light emission mode. Here, the light emission mode during the first vibration may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The light emitting mode during the second vibration may be, for example, a case where the emitted light color is red or a rainbow color. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV01 is different from the vibration pattern AKV02, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emission mode may be different between the light emission effect accompanying the first vibration effect and the light emission effect accompanying the second vibration effect. Here, the light emission mode is different because, for example, when the remaining number of times is other than "0" depending on the continuous effect pattern, the light emission color of the operation part effect pattern is different from when the remaining number of times is "0". Good to have.
In such a configuration, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
Each configuration related to the characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK may be combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of the configurations of other features as appropriate.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 5 Image display device 9 Game effect lamp 9B1 Lever lamp 9B2 Button lamp 9C Upper frame lamp 9M Left frame lamp 9N Right frame lamp 11 Main board 12 Production control board 31A Stick controller 31B Push Button 32 Movable body 100 Microcomputer 120 for game control CPU for performance control
131 Vibration motor 200 Dispensing device 202 First guide passage forming part 201 Ball tank forming part 203 First passage forming body 210 Terminal board 220 Cover bodies 271A to 271H Holes 314, 324, 334 Cover part 340 Ball stop members N1 to 6, 11-16 Screw members

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a starting area;
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
a vibration performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance and a special vibration performance as the vibration performance in which the operating means vibrates;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming part having an open top surface and forming a guide passage for guiding game media in the storage part to the payout part;
a screw drop restriction portion provided to cover the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion;
Equipped with
The vibration effect can be executed based on the gaming medium dispensed from the dispensing unit entering the starting area,
The screw fall restriction part is
The game medium that has fallen onto the screw fall restriction portion does not stay there, and the screw member that has fallen onto the screw fall restriction portion can stay on the screw fall restriction portion without falling into the guide path forming portion. configured,
A first component capable of retaining the screw member that has fallen onto the screw fall restricting portion on the screw fall restricting portion; and a second component having a higher degree of retention of the screw member than the first component. have,
The second component is configured at a position closer to the dispensing part than the first component,
The vibration performance execution means is capable of executing the vibration performance in conjunction with execution of a specific performance,
A gaming machine in which vibration modes are different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance.